JP5487348B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention includes a variable display unit that variably displays a plurality of types of identification information that can identify each of them. The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine or a slot machine that is controlled to an advantageous specific gaming state.

  As a gaming machine, a game ball, which is a game medium, is launched into a game area by a launching device, and when a game ball wins a prize area such as a prize opening provided in the game area, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out to the player. There is something to be done. Further, a variable display device capable of variably displaying the identification information (also referred to as “fluctuation”) is provided, and when the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes a specific display result in the variable display device, the game state (game There is a machine configured to give a predetermined game value to a player (specifically, a state in which a gaming machine is controlled).

  The game value is the right that the state of the variable winning ball apparatus provided in the gaming area of the gaming machine becomes advantageous for a player who is easy to win, and the right for becoming advantageous for a player. In other words, or a condition for winning a prize ball is easily established.

  In a pachinko machine, a specific display mode determined in advance is derived and displayed as a display result of variable display of special symbols (identification information) that is started in the variable display device based on the winning of a game ball at the start winning opening. If this happens, a “big hit” will occur. The derived display is to finally stop and display a symbol (final stop symbol). When the big hit occurs, for example, the big winning opening is opened a predetermined number of times, and the game shifts to a big hit gaming state where the hit ball is easy to win. And in each open period, if there is a prize for a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the big prize opening, the big prize opening is closed. And the number of times of opening the special winning opening is fixed to a predetermined number (for example, 15 rounds). An opening time (for example, 29 seconds) is determined for each opening, and even if the number of winnings does not reach a predetermined number, the big winning opening is closed when the opening time elapses. Hereinafter, the opening period of each special winning opening may be referred to as a round. A game in a round may be referred to as a round game.

  In the variable display device, the symbols other than the symbol that becomes the final stop symbol (for example, the middle symbol in the left, middle, and right symbols) continue for a predetermined period of time and stop and shake in a state that matches the specific display result. It can be a big hit before the final result is displayed because it is moving, scaling, or deforming, or multiple symbols change synchronously with the same symbol, or the position of the displayed symbol is switched. An effect performed in a state where the sex is continued (hereinafter, these states are referred to as reach states) is referred to as reach effect. Further, the reach state and its state are referred to as a reach mode. Furthermore, variable display including reach production is called reach variable display. Then, when the display result of the symbol variably displayed on the variable display device is not a specific display result, it becomes “out of” and the variability display state ends. A player plays a game while enjoying how to generate a big hit.

  In addition, an effect of notifying that there is a high possibility that a big hit or reach (particularly super reach) will occur is called a notice effect. The reach effect is an effect in the state where the symbols other than the symbol that will be the final stop symbol are aligned. Naturally, it can be executed even after the symbols other than the symbols to be the final stop symbols are prepared.

  As such a gaming machine, a plurality of characters are successively switched at a predetermined timing as a notice effect that is performed after the variable display device starts variable display of a symbol and until the display result of the variable display is derived and displayed. A plurality of types of notice effects (referred to as step-up notice effects in the present application) are prepared in advance, which are the notice effects, and the display timing (switching timing) of each character (each step effect) in the notice effects is different. Among the up-notice effects, one that selects and executes one step-up effect has been proposed (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Laying-Open No. 2005-118416 (paragraphs 0188-0194, FIG. 18)

  In various notice effects such as step-up notice effects and cut-in notice effects at the time of reach (an effect that inserts another image scene in a series of image scenes), each notice effect is a special mode (for example, a part of the notice display) It is reported that the degree of expectation for a big hit is high by making it appear in a common pattern or color that appears in However, there is a possibility that the interest for the game cannot be sufficiently improved simply by causing a special aspect to appear in the notice effect.

  Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can further enhance the interest of the game when performing an effect of causing a special aspect to appear in the notice effect.

  The gaming machine according to the present invention has a specific display result (for example, jackpot) predetermined on variable display means (for example, the effect display device 9) that variably displays a plurality of types of identification information (for example, effect symbols) that can be identified. When the symbol is displayed, the identification information display result indicates whether or not the game machine controls to a specific gaming state (for example, a big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player. Predetermining means (for example, a part for executing step S61 in the game control microcomputer 560) determined before being derived and displayed, and a plurality of notice effects for notifying that the specific display result is determined by the predetermining means. (For example, first step-up notice effect, second step-up notice effect, movable object notice effect, button notice effect, frame notice effect, mini character The notice effect determining means for determining whether or not to execute each of the notification effect and the effect feather effect notice effect (for example, the part executing steps S570 to S586 in the effect control microcomputer 100) and the notice effect determining means. The presentation mode of each announcement effect determined to be executed is shown in the normal mode (for example, the display mode of the ground 205 shown in FIG. 109 (A), the display mode of the tree 200 shown in FIG. 110 (A), and FIG. 111 (A). The display mode of the person B211 shown, the display mode of the seagull 250 shown in FIG. 112A, the display mode of the effect symbols 9L and 9R shown in FIG. 113A), or a special mode (for example, different from the normal mode) 109B, an arabesque pattern display mode of the ground 205A, a tree 200A arabesque pattern display mode shown in FIG. 110B, and FIG. 111B. The display mode of the arabesque pattern of the object B211A, the display mode of the arabesque pattern of the seagull 250A shown in FIG. The notice mode determining means (for example, the part that executes steps S587A to S587Z in the microcomputer 100 for effect control) and the notice mode of the notice effect determined by the notice mode determining means as the special mode are designated as the special mode. A notice effect is executed during variable display of the identification information in the notice aspect change means that can be changed from the aspect to the normal aspect and the effect aspect determined by the notice aspect determination means or the effect aspect changed by the notice aspect change means. Preliminary effect execution means (for example, steps S842 to S85 in the effect control microcomputer 100) And the notice mode determining means is determined not to be the specific display result by the prior determination means when it is determined to be the specific display result by the prior determination means. It is determined that the effect mode of the notice effect determined to be executed by the notice effect determining means at a higher rate than the case is to be a special mode (for example, the effect control microcomputer 100 is shown in FIGS. 81 to 87. As shown, steps S587A to S587Z are executed using the jackpot motif mode setting table assigned with allocation values at a higher rate for the motif display execution than the outlier motif mode setting table), the notice mode The changing means is a case where the notice mode determining means decides to make the effect modes of the plurality of notice effects as a special aspect, When changing the appearance mode from the special mode to the normal mode, the production mode of some of the preliminary announcements determined to be the special mode is changed from the special mode to the normal mode. At least a part of the notice effect executed in a special manner in which the change means can change the effect mode to the normal mode is a common effect mode (part of the notice display for notifying that the jackpot has been determined to be a big hit) Is displayed in common in each notice effect, and is specifically executed in a predetermined pattern or color (may be a shape) that appears in a part of the notice display. And

  In the gaming machine according to claim 1, when the notice mode determining means is determined to be the specific display result by the prior determining means, it is determined not to be the specific display result by the prior determining means. It is determined that the display mode of the notice effect that is determined to be executed by the notice effect determining unit is set to be a special mode at a higher rate than the case where the notice mode change unit is able to change the effect mode to the normal mode. Since at least a part of the notice effect executed in the aspect is configured to be executed in a common effect aspect (motif aspect) in each notice effect, the game is more effective when the effect is performed in the special form in the notice effect. Can improve interest in

It is the front view which looked at the pachinko game machine from the front. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structural example of a game control board (main board). It is a block diagram showing an example of circuit configuration of an effect control board, a lamp driver board and an audio output board. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of operation | movement of a movable member. It is a flowchart which shows the main process which CPU in the microcomputer for game control performs. It is a flowchart which shows a 2 ms timer interruption process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the quasi-continuous chance eyes. It is explanatory drawing which shows a fluctuation pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows a fluctuation pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is explanatory drawing which shows the big hit determination table and the big hit classification determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern classification determination table for big hits. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern classification determination table for big hits. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern classification determination table for small hits. It is explanatory drawing which shows a reach determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern classification determination table for reach. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern classification determination table for non-reach. It is explanatory drawing which shows a hit fluctuation pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a hit fluctuation pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a deviation variation pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a deviation variation pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the quasi-continuous production pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the quasi-continuous production pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows a starting port switch passage process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a pending | holding storage specific information storage area (holding specific area). It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a display result specific command transmission process. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol change process. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol stop process. It is a flowchart which shows the big winning opening opening pre-processing. It is a flowchart which shows a big winning opening open process. It is a flowchart which shows a big winning opening open process. It is a flowchart which shows a big hit end process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a display operation in the variable display of an effect symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a display operation in the variable display of an effect symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a display operation in the variable display of an effect symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a display operation in the variable display of an effect symbol. It is a flowchart which shows the presentation control main process which CPU for presentation control performs. It is a flowchart which shows a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows a command analysis process. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the aspect of the variable display of a decoration design. It is explanatory drawing which shows the random number which the microcomputer for production control uses. It is explanatory drawing which shows the last stop symbol determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a left-right output determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the non-reach combination which does not become a final stop symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows the last stop symbol determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the last stop symbol determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a specific production pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a temporary stop symbol determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a temporary stop symbol determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the temporary stop symbol in a pseudo | simulation continuous change. It is explanatory drawing which shows a design fluctuation control pattern table. It is explanatory drawing which shows an effect control pattern table. It is a flowchart which shows production control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process. It is a flowchart which shows an effect design fluctuation start process. It is a flowchart which shows an effect design fluctuation start process. It is a flowchart which shows a specific effect setting process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of process data. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the production | presentation performed according to the content of a process table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of each notice effect in a 1st step-up notice, and the content of each notice effect in a 2nd step-up notice. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state by which the 2nd system | strain notice area is enlarged and displayed in the change timing of the 2nd step-up notice effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the aspect (pattern) of the enlarged display of a 2nd system | strain notice area. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state by which a 2nd system | strain notice area is expanded and displayed in the multiple types of change timing of 2nd step-up notice effect. It is a flowchart which shows a notification effect setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a notification effect setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a notification effect setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a notification effect setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a notification effect setting process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a notice classification determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a 2nd notice setting table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a 1st notice setting table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a movable-object notice selection table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a button notice selection table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the table for selecting another notice effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a motif aspect setting table (for the ground). It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a motif aspect setting table (for wood). It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a motif mode setting table (for people). It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a motif aspect setting table (for seagulls). It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a motif aspect setting table (for symbols). It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a motif aspect setting table (for mail). It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a motif aspect setting table (for cards). It is explanatory drawing which shows the propriety of the 1st step up notice and the 2nd step up notice combination. It is explanatory drawing which shows the propriety of the combination of a 1st step-up notice and a 2nd step-up notice. It is explanatory drawing which shows the propriety of the combination of a 1st step-up notice and a 2nd step-up notice. It is explanatory drawing which shows the propriety of the combination of a 1st step-up notice and a 2nd step-up notice. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a rewriting table. It is a flowchart which shows the process during effect design change. It is a timing diagram which shows the execution timing of various notice effects. It is a timing diagram which shows the button effective period in button notice effect. It is a timing diagram which shows the appearance timing of an arabesque motif aspect. It is a timing diagram which shows the appearance timing of an arabesque motif aspect. It is a timing diagram which shows the appearance timing of an arabesque motif aspect. It is a flowchart which shows an effect design fluctuation stop process. It is a flowchart which shows a big hit display process. It is a flowchart which shows a process during a round. It is a flowchart which shows a round post-process. It is a flowchart which shows a round post-process. It is a flowchart which shows a big hit end effect process. It is a timing diagram which shows the notice timing in the specific example of the 1st notice effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a 1st notice effect. It is a timing diagram which shows the appearance timing of the arabesque motif aspect in the specific example of a 1st notice effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example in which an arabesque motif aspect appears when the 1st notice effect is performed. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example in case the ground displayed on an effect display apparatus is displayed with an arabesque motif aspect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example in case the tree displayed on an effect display apparatus is displayed with an arabesque motif aspect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example in case the person displayed on an effect display apparatus is displayed with an arabesque motif aspect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example in case "gull" displayed on an effect display apparatus is displayed with an arabesque motif aspect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example in case the effect design displayed on an effect display apparatus is displayed with an arabesque motif aspect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a 2nd announcement effect. It is a timing diagram which shows the notice timing in the specific example of the 3rd notice effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a 3rd notice effect. It is a timing diagram which shows the notice timing in the specific example of the 4th notice effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a 4th notice effect. It is a timing diagram which shows the notice timing in the specific example of the 5th notice effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a 5th notification effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a 6th notification effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a 7th notification effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example which makes an arabesque motif aspect appear when performing the mail notice which is the 7th notice effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the 8th notice effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example which makes an arabesque motif aspect appear when performing the card notice which is the 8th notice effect. It is a flowchart which shows the notification effect setting process in the case of restrict | limiting the number of the arabesque motif aspect made to appear during variable display based on whether a probability change promotion effect is performed. It is a flowchart which shows a notice effect setting process in the case of restrict | limiting the number of the arabesque motif aspect made to appear during variable display based on whether a probability change promotion is successful in a probability change promotion effect.

  Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of a pachinko gaming machine 1 that is an example of a gaming machine will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 as seen from the front.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 includes an outer frame (not shown) formed in a vertically long rectangular shape, and a game frame attached to the inside of the outer frame so as to be opened and closed. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a glass door frame 2 formed in a frame shape that is provided in the game frame so as to be opened and closed. The game frame includes a front frame (not shown) that can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame, a mechanism plate (not shown) to which mechanism parts and the like are attached, and various parts (games to be described later) attached to them. A structure including the board 6).

  On the lower surface of the glass door frame 2 is a hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 3. Under the hitting ball supply tray 3, there are provided a surplus ball receiving tray 4 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hitting ball supply tray 3, and a hitting operation handle (operation knob) 5 for firing the hitting ball. A game board 6 is detachably attached to the back surface of the glass door frame 2. The game board 6 is a structure including a plate-like body constituting the game board 6 and various components attached to the plate-like body. In addition, a game area 7 is formed on the front surface of the game board 6 in which a game ball that has been struck can flow down.

  An effect display device 9 composed of a liquid crystal display device (LCD) is provided near the center of the game area 7. The circular display screen of the effect display device 9 includes an effect symbol display area for performing variable display of the effect symbol in synchronization with the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Therefore, the effect display device 9 corresponds to a variable display device that performs variable display of effect symbols. The effect symbol display area includes a symbol display area for variably displaying, for example, three decorative (effect) effect symbols of “left”, “middle”, and “right”. The symbol display area includes “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas (see symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R in FIG. 106, etc.). The display screen of the device 9 may not be fixed, and the three areas of the symbol display area may be separated. The effect display device 9 is controlled by an effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board. When the first special symbol display 8a is executing variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control microcomputer causes the effect display device 9 to execute the effect display along with the variable display, and the second special symbol display 8a executes the second special display. When the variable display of the second special symbol is executed on the symbol display 8b, the effect display is executed by the effect display device 9 along with the variable display, so that the progress of the game can be easily grasped. .

  On the left side of the lower part of the game board 6, a first special symbol display (first variable display portion) 8a for variably displaying the first special symbol as identification information is provided. In this embodiment, the first special symbol display 8a is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7 segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers 0 to 9. In other words, the first special symbol display 8a is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) from 0 to 9. On the lower right side of the game board 6, a second special symbol display (second variable display portion) 8b for variably displaying the second special symbol as identification information is provided. The second special symbol display 8b is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7 segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers 0 to 9. That is, the second special symbol display 8b is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) from 0 to 9.

  The small display is formed in a square shape, for example. In this embodiment, the type of the first special symbol and the type of the second special symbol are the same (for example, both 0 to 9), but the types may be different. Further, the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b may be configured to variably display numbers (or two-digit symbols) of, for example, 00 to 99, for example.

  Hereinafter, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a special symbol, and the first special symbol indicator 8a and the second special symbol indicator 8b are collectively referred to as a special symbol indicator (variable display unit). There are things to do.

  For the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the first start condition or the second start condition, which is the variable display execution condition, is satisfied (for example, the game ball has the first start winning opening 13 or the second start winning opening) 14), a variable display start condition (for example, when the number of reserved memories is not 0 and the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is not executed) , A state where the big hit game is not executed) is established, and when the variable display time elapses, a display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. Note that winning means that a game ball has passed through a predetermined area such as a winning opening. Deriving and displaying a display result is to stop and display a symbol (an example of identification information) (excluding stop before so-called re-variation). In this embodiment, the variable display start condition is established in the order in which the start prizes are generated regardless of the prizes in the first start prize slot 13 and the second start prize slot 14. The variable display start condition may be established by giving priority to one of winning in the winning opening 13 and winning in the second start winning opening 14. For example, when giving priority to winning in the first start winning opening 13, the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is not executed, and the big hit game is not executed. For example, even when the second reserved memory number is not zero, the variable display of the first special symbol is continuously executed until the first reserved memory number becomes zero.

  In the vicinity of the first special symbol display 8a, during the variable display time of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display 8a, the variable display of the first decorative symbol as a decorative (design) symbol is performed. A first decorative symbol display 9a is provided. In this embodiment, the first decorative symbol display 9a is composed of two LEDs. The first decorative symbol display 9a is controlled by an effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board. Further, in the vicinity of the second special symbol display 8b, during the variable display time of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display 8b, the variable display of the second decorative symbol as a symbol for decoration (for production) is performed. There is provided a second decorative symbol display 9b. The second decorative symbol display 9b is composed of two LEDs. The second decorative symbol display 9b is controlled by an effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board.

  The first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol may be collectively referred to as a decorative symbol, and the first decorative symbol display 9a and the second decorative symbol display 9b may be collectively referred to as a decorative symbol display. .

  The variation of the decorative design (variable display) is realized by continuing the state where the two LEDs are alternately lit. The variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a and the variable display of the first decorative symbol on the first decorative symbol display 9a are synchronized. The variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b is synchronized with the variable display of the second decorative symbol on the second decorative symbol display 9b. Synchronous means that the variable display start time and end time are the same, and the variable display period is the same. In addition, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, the LED on the side that recalls the big hit on the first decorative symbol display 9a remains lit. When the big-hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b, the LED on the side that recalls the big-hit on the second decorative symbol display 9b remains lit. The functions of the first decorative symbol display 9a and the second decorative symbol display 9b may be realized by the effect display device 9. That is, the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol may be controlled to be variably displayed as images on the display screen of the effect display device 9.

  A winning device having a first start winning port 13 is provided below the effect display device 9. The game ball won in the first start winning opening 13 is guided to the back of the game board 6 and detected by the first start opening switch 13a.

  A variable winning ball device 15 having a second starting winning port 14 through which a game ball can be won is provided below a winning device having a first starting winning port (first starting port) 13. The game ball that has won the second start winning opening (second start opening) 14 is guided to the back of the game board 6 and detected by the second start opening switch 14a. The variable winning ball device 15 is opened by a solenoid 16. When the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state, the game ball can be awarded to the second starting winning port 14 (it is easier to start winning), which is advantageous for the player. In the state where the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is in the open state, it is easier for the game ball to win the second start winning opening 14 than the first starting winning opening 13. In addition, in a state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the closed state, the game ball does not win the second start winning opening 14. Therefore, in a state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the closed state, it is easier for the game ball to win the first starting winning port 13 than the second starting winning port 14. In the state where the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is in the closed state, it may be configured that the winning is possible (that is, it is difficult for the gaming ball to win) although it is difficult to win a prize.

  Hereinafter, the first start winning opening 13 and the second start winning opening 14 may be collectively referred to as a start winning opening or a starting opening.

  When the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to be in the open state, the game ball heading for the variable winning ball device 15 is very likely to win the second start winning port 14. The first start winning opening 13 is provided directly under the effect display device 9, but the interval between the lower end of the effect display device 9 and the first start winning opening 13 is further reduced, or the first start winning opening is set. The nail arrangement around the first start winning opening 13 is made difficult to guide the game balls to the first starting winning opening 13 so that the winning rate of the second starting winning opening 14 is increased. It is also possible to make the direction higher than the winning rate of the first start winning opening 13.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, the variable winning ball apparatus 15 that opens and closes only the second start winning opening 14 is provided. Any of the start winning ports 14 may be provided with a variable winning ball device that performs an opening / closing operation.

  On the side of the first decorative symbol display 9a, the number of effective winning balls that have entered the first start winning opening 13, that is, the first reserved memory number (the reserved memory is also referred to as the start memory or the start prize memory) is displayed. A first special symbol storage memory display 18a comprising four displays is provided. The first special symbol storage memory indicator 18a increases the number of indicators to be lit by 1 each time there is an effective start winning. Then, each time the variable display on the first special symbol display 8a is started, the number of indicators to be turned on is reduced by one.

  On the side of the second decorative symbol display 9b is a second special symbol reserved memory display 18b comprising four indicators for displaying the number of effective winning balls that have entered the second start winning opening 14, that is, the second reserved memory number. Is provided. The second special symbol storage memory display 18b increases the number of indicators to be lit by 1 every time there is an effective start winning. Then, each time the variable display on the second special symbol display 8b is started, the number of indicators to be turned on is reduced by one.

  In addition, the display screen of the effect display device 9 displays an area (hereinafter referred to as a summed pending storage display unit 18c) that displays a total number (total number of pending pending memories) that is the sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number. .) Is provided. Since the summation pending storage display unit 18c for displaying the total number is provided, it is possible to easily grasp the total number of execution conditions that have not met the variable display start condition. In addition, since the 1st special symbol holding | maintenance memory | storage display 18a and the 2nd special symbol holding | maintenance memory | storage display 18b are provided, the total reservation memory | storage display part 18c does not necessarily need to be provided.

  The effect display device 9 is for decoration (for effects) during the variable display time of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display 8a and during the variable display time of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display 8b. A variable display of the effect symbol as the symbol is performed. The variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a and the variable display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 9 are synchronized. Further, the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b and the variable display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 9 are synchronized. Further, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a and when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b, the effect display device 9 reminds the jackpot The combination of is stopped and displayed.

  On the left side of the decorative portion around the effect display device 9, a movable member 78 that is attached to the rotation shaft of the motor 86 and moves when the motor 86 rotates is provided. In this embodiment, the movable member 78 operates when a pseudo-series effect or a notice effect (movable object notice effect) is executed. Further, in the decorative portion around the effect display device 9, a blade-shaped movable member (hereinafter referred to as an effect blade accessory) that is attached to the rotating shaft of the motor 87 and moves when the motor 87 rotates is provided below the left and right. 79a and 79b are provided. In this embodiment, the production blade actors 79a and 79b operate when a notice production (production blade production notice production) is executed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 1, a special variable winning ball device 20 is provided below the variable winning ball device 15. The special variable winning ball apparatus 20 includes an opening / closing plate, and when the specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, and the specific display result (big hit symbol) on the second special symbol display 8b. When the open / close plate is controlled to be open by the solenoid 21 in the specific game state (big hit game state) that occurs when the symbol is derived and displayed, the big winning opening serving as the winning area is opened. The game ball that has won the big winning opening is detected by the count switch 23.

  The game area 6 is also provided with winning ports (ordinary winning ports) 29, 30, 33, and 39 for paying out a predetermined number of premium game balls determined in advance based on winning of the game balls. The game balls won in the winning openings 29, 30, 33, 39 are detected by the winning opening switches 29a, 30a, 33a, 39a.

  A normal symbol display 10 is provided on the right side of the game board 6. The normal symbol display 10 variably displays a plurality of types of identification information (for example, “◯” and “x”) called normal symbols.

  When the game ball passes through the gate 32 and is detected by the gate switch 32a, variable display of the normal symbol display 10 is started. In this embodiment, variable display is performed by alternately lighting the upper and lower lamps (the symbols can be visually recognized when turned on). For example, if the lower lamp is turned on at the end of the variable display, it is a hit. . When the stop symbol on the normal symbol display 10 is a predetermined symbol (winning symbol), the variable winning ball device 15 is opened for a predetermined number of times. In other words, the state of the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is a state that is advantageous from a disadvantageous state for the player when the normal symbol is a stop symbol (a state in which a game ball can be awarded at the second start winning port 14). To change. In the vicinity of the normal symbol display 10, a normal symbol holding storage display 41 having a display unit with four LEDs for displaying the number of winning balls that have passed through the gate 32 is provided. Each time there is a game ball passing through the gate 32, that is, every time a game ball is detected by the gate switch 32a, the normal symbol storage memory display 41 increases the number of LEDs to be turned on by one. Each time variable display on the normal symbol display 10 is started, the number of LEDs to be lit is reduced by one. Further, in the probability variation state where the probability of being determined to be a big hit as compared to the normal state is high, the probability that the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 becomes a winning symbol is increased, and the variable winning ball apparatus 15 Opening time and opening times are increased. Even in the short state (the game state in which the variable display time of the special symbol is shortened) when the symbol variation time is shortened although it is not the probability variation state, the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball device 15 are increased.

  On the left and right sides of the game area 7 of the game board 6, there are provided decorative LEDs 25 that are displayed blinking during the game, and at the lower part there is an outlet 26 for taking in a hit ball that has not won. In addition, two speakers 27 that utter sound effects and sounds as predetermined sound outputs are provided on the left and right upper portions outside the game area 7. On the outer periphery of the game area 7, a frame LED 28 provided on the front frame is provided.

  The members constituting the hitting ball supply tray 3 are provided with operation buttons 120 as operation means that can be operated by the player. The operation button 120 is provided with a push button switch that can be pressed by the player. The operation button 120 is provided not only with a push button switch that can be pressed by the player, but also with a dial that can be rotated by the player. The player can perform a predetermined selection (for example, selection of effects) by rotating the dial.

  In the gaming machine, a ball striking device (not shown) that drives a driving motor in response to a player operating the batting operation handle 5 and uses the rotational force of the driving motor to launch a gaming ball to the gaming area 7. ) Is provided. A game ball launched from the ball striking device enters the game area 7 through a ball striking rail formed in a circular shape so as to surround the game area 7, and then descends the game area 7. When the game ball enters the first start winning opening 13 and is detected by the first start opening switch 13a, if the variable display of the first special symbol can be started (for example, the variable display of the special symbol ends, 1), the first special symbol display 8a starts variable display (variation) of the first special symbol, and the first decorative symbol display 9a displays variable display of the first decorative symbol. The effect display device 9 starts variable display of effect symbols. In other words, the variable display of the first special symbol, the first decorative symbol, and the effect symbol corresponds to winning in the first start winning opening 13. If the variable display of the first special symbol cannot be started, the first reserved memory number is increased by 1 on the condition that the first reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value.

  When the game ball enters the second start winning opening 14 and is detected by the second start opening switch 14a, if the variable display of the second special symbol can be started (for example, the special symbol variable display ends, 2), the second special symbol display 8b starts variable display (variation) of the second special symbol, and the second decorative symbol display 9b displays variable display of the second decorative symbol. The effect display device 9 starts variable display of effect symbols. That is, the variable display of the second special symbol, the second decorative symbol, and the effect symbol corresponds to winning in the second start winning opening 14. If the variable display of the second special symbol cannot be started, the second reserved memory number is increased by 1 on condition that the second reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value.

  In this embodiment, when it is informed that it is a probable big hit or a probable promotion effect (a special effect indicating promotion to a probable state), the gaming state is shifted to a high probability state. At the same time, the game ball is controlled to be in a high base state that is controlled so as to make it easier for the game ball to start and win (that is, the execution conditions for variable display in the special symbol indicators 8a and 8b and the effect display device 9 are easily established). Transition. In addition, when the gaming state is shifted to the short time state, the state is shifted to the high base state. In the high base state, for example, the frequency at which the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state is increased or the time in which the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state is extended compared to the case in which the high base state is not in the high base state. It becomes easier to win a start.

  Instead of extending the time during which the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is in the open state (also referred to as the open extended state), the normal symbol display unit 10 shifts to a normal symbol probability changing state in which the probability that the stop symbol in the normal symbol display unit 10 will be a hit symbol is increased. Depending on the situation, the high base state may be entered. When the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 becomes a predetermined symbol (winning symbol), the variable winning ball device 15 is opened for a predetermined number of times. In this case, by performing the transition control to the normal symbol probability changing state, the probability that the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 becomes a winning symbol is increased, and the frequency at which the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is opened is increased. Therefore, if the normal symbol probability changing state is entered, the opening time and the number of opening times of the variable winning ball device 15 are increased, and a state where it is easy to start a winning (high base state) is achieved. That is, the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball device 15 can be increased when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a winning symbol or the stop symbol of the special symbol is a probabilistic symbol. It changes to an advantageous state (a state where it is easy to win a start). It should be noted that increasing the number of times of opening is a concept including changing from a closed state to an open state.

  Moreover, you may transfer to a high base state by shifting to the normal symbol time short state where the fluctuation time (variable display period) of the normal symbol in the normal symbol display 10 is shortened. In the normal symbol short-time state, the variation time of the normal symbol is shortened, so that the frequency of starting the variation of the normal symbol increases, and as a result, the frequency of hitting the normal symbol increases. Therefore, when the frequency that the normal symbol is hit increases, the frequency that the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is opened is increased, and the start winning state is easily set (high base state).

  In addition, the change time of special symbols and production symbols will be shortened by shifting to the short time state when the variation time (variable display period) of special symbols and production symbols is shortened. (In other words, the digestion of the stored memory becomes faster), and as a result, it is easier to start a winning and the possibility of playing a big hit game is increased.

  Furthermore, by making transitions to all the states shown above (open extended state, normal symbol probability change state, normal symbol short time state, and special symbol short time state), it will be easier to win a start (shift to a high base state). May be. In addition, it is easier to win a start (high base) by shifting to any one of the above states (open extended state, normal symbol probability changing state, normal symbol short time state, and special symbol short time state). Transition to a state).

  FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an example of the circuit configuration of the main board (game control board) 31. FIG. 2 also shows a payout control board 37, an effect control board 80, and the like. A game control microcomputer (corresponding to game control means) 560 for controlling the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program is mounted on the main board 31. The game control microcomputer 560 includes a ROM 54 for storing a game control (game progress control) program and the like, a RAM 55 as storage means used as a work memory, a CPU 56 for performing control operations in accordance with the program, and an I / O port unit 57. including. In this embodiment, the ROM 54 and the RAM 55 are built in the game control microcomputer 560. That is, the game control microcomputer 560 is a one-chip microcomputer. The one-chip microcomputer only needs to incorporate at least the CPU 56 and the RAM 55, and the ROM 54 may be external or built-in. The I / O port unit 57 may be externally attached. The game control microcomputer 560 further includes a random number circuit 503 that generates hardware random numbers (random numbers generated by the hardware circuit).

  The RAM 55 is a backup RAM as a non-volatile storage means, part or all of which is backed up by a backup power source created on the power supply substrate 910. That is, even if the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 55 is stored for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply cannot be supplied). In particular, at least data (a special symbol process flag or the like) corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means, and data indicating the number of unpaid winning balls are stored in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data when the power is restored after a power failure or the like occurs. Further, data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress state of the game. In this embodiment, it is assumed that the entire RAM 55 is backed up.

  In the game control microcomputer 560, the CPU 56 executes control in accordance with the program stored in the ROM 54, so that the game control microcomputer 560 (or CPU 56) executes (or performs processing) hereinafter. Specifically, the CPU 56 executes control according to a program. The same applies to microcomputers mounted on substrates other than the main substrate 31.

  The random number circuit 503 is a hardware circuit that is used to generate a random number for determination to determine whether or not to win a jackpot based on a display result of variable symbol special display. The random number circuit 503 updates numerical data in accordance with a set update rule within a numerical range in which an initial value (for example, 0) and an upper limit value (for example, 65535) are set, and starts at a random timing Based on the fact that the winning time is the reading (extraction) of the numerical data, it has a random number generation function in which the numerical data to be read becomes a random value.

  The random number circuit 503 includes a numeric data update range selection setting function (initial value selection setting function and upper limit value selection setting function), numeric data update rule selection setting function, and numeric data update rule selection. It has various functions such as a switching function. With such a function, the randomness of the generated random numbers can be improved.

  Further, the game control microcomputer 560 has a function of setting an initial value of numerical data updated by the random number circuit 503. For example, a predetermined calculation is performed using the ID number of the game control microcomputer 560 stored in a predetermined storage area such as the ROM 54 (an ID number assigned with a different value for each product of the game control microcomputer 560). The numerical data obtained by the execution is set as the initial value of the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 503. By performing such processing, the randomness of the random number generated by the random number circuit 503 can be further improved.

  Further, an input driver circuit 58 for supplying detection signals from the gate switch 32a, the start port switch 13a, the count switch 23, and the winning port switches 29a, 30a, 33a, 39a to the game control microcomputer 560 is also mounted on the main board 31. Yes. The main board also includes an output circuit 59 for driving the solenoid 16 for opening and closing the variable winning ball device 15 and the solenoid 21 for opening and closing the special variable winning ball device 20 that forms a big winning opening in accordance with a command from the game control microcomputer 560. 31.

  In addition, the game control microcomputer 560 includes a first special symbol display 8a, a second special symbol display 8b that variably displays special symbols, a normal symbol display 10 that variably displays normal symbols, and a first special symbol hold memory. Display control of the display 18a, the second special symbol storage memory display 18b, and the normal symbol storage memory display 41 is performed.

  An information output circuit (not shown) that outputs an information output signal such as jackpot information indicating the occurrence of a jackpot gaming state to an external device such as a hall computer is also mounted on the main board 31.

  In this embodiment, the effect control means (configured by the effect control microcomputer) mounted on the effect control board 80 instructs the effect contents from the game control microcomputer 560 via the relay board 77. Upon receiving the effect control command, display control is performed on the first decorative symbol display device 9a and the second decorative symbol display device 9b that variably display the decorative symbol, and the effect display device 9 that variably displays the effect symbol.

  In addition, the effect control means mounted on the effect control board 80 controls the display of the decoration LED 25 provided on the game board and the frame LED 28 provided on the frame side via the lamp driver board 35. The sound output from the speaker 27 is controlled via the sound output board 70.

  FIG. 3 is a block diagram illustrating a circuit configuration example of the relay board 77, the effect control board 80, the lamp driver board 35, and the audio output board 70. In the example shown in FIG. 3, the lamp driver board 35 and the audio output board 70 are not equipped with a microcomputer, but may be equipped with a microcomputer. Further, without providing the lamp driver board 35 and the audio output board 70, only the effect control board 80 may be provided for effect control.

  The effect control board 80 includes an effect control CPU 101 and an effect control microcomputer 100 including a RAM for storing information related to effects such as effect symbol process flags. The RAM may be externally attached. In this embodiment, the RAM in the production control microcomputer 100 is not backed up. In the effect control board 80, the effect control CPU 101 operates in accordance with a program stored in a built-in or external ROM (not shown), and receives a capture signal from the main board 31 input via the relay board 77 ( In response to the (effect control INT signal), an effect control command is received via the input driver 102 and the input port 103. Further, the effect control CPU 101 causes the VDP (video display processor) 109 to perform display control of the effect display device 9 based on the effect control command.

  In this embodiment, a VDP 109 that performs display control of the effect display device 9 in cooperation with the effect control microcomputer 100 is mounted on the effect control board 80. The VDP 109 has an address space independent of the production control microcomputer 100, and maps a VRAM therein. VRAM is a buffer memory for developing image data. Then, the VDP 109 outputs the image data in the VRAM to the effect display device 9 via the frame memory.

  The effect control CPU 101 outputs to the VDP 109 a command for reading out necessary data from a CGROM (not shown) in accordance with the received effect control command. The CGROM stores character image data and moving image data displayed on the effect display device 9, specifically, a person, characters, figures, symbols (including effect symbols), and background image data in advance. ROM. The VDP 109 reads image data from the CGROM in response to the instruction from the effect control CPU 101. The VDP 109 executes display control based on the read image data.

  The effect control command and the effect control INT signal are first input to the input driver 102 on the effect control board 80. The input driver 102 passes the signal input from the relay board 77 only in the direction toward the inside of the effect control board 80 (does not pass the signal in the direction from the inside of the effect control board 80 to the relay board 77). It is also a unidirectional circuit as a regulating means.

  As a signal direction regulating means, the signal inputted from the main board 31 is allowed to pass through the relay board 77 only in the direction toward the effect control board 80 (the signal is not passed in the direction from the effect control board 80 to the relay board 77). The unidirectional circuit 74 is mounted. For example, a diode or a transistor is used as the unidirectional circuit. FIG. 3 illustrates a diode. A unidirectional circuit is provided for each signal. Furthermore, since the effect control command and the effect control INT signal are output from the main board 31 via the output port 571 that is a unidirectional circuit, the signal from the relay board 77 toward the inside of the main board 31 is restricted. That is, the signal from the relay board 77 does not enter the inside of the main board 31 (the game control microcomputer 560 side). The output port 571 is a part of the I / O port unit 57 shown in FIG. Further, a signal driver circuit that is a unidirectional circuit may be further provided outside the output port 571 (on the relay board 77 side).

  The effect control CPU 101 drives the motor 86 to operate the movable member 78 via the output port 106. Further, the effect control CPU 101 drives a motor 87 for operating the effect blades 79 a and 79 b via the output port 106.

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 inputs a signal from the operation button 120 via the input port 107 in response to a pressing operation of the operation button 120 by the player.

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 outputs a signal for driving the LED to the lamp driver board 35 via the output port 105. Further, the production control CPU 101 outputs sound number data to the audio output board 70 via the output port 104.

  In the lamp driver board 35, a signal for driving the LED is input to the LED driver 352 via the input driver 351. The LED driver 352 supplies a current to a light emitter provided on the frame side such as the frame LED 28 based on a signal for driving the LED. Further, an electric current is supplied to the decoration LED 25 provided on the game board side.

  In the voice output board 70, the sound number data is input to the voice synthesis IC 703 via the input driver 702. The voice synthesizing IC 703 generates voice or sound effect according to the sound number data and outputs it to the amplifier circuit 705. The amplification circuit 705 outputs an audio signal obtained by amplifying the output level of the speech synthesis IC 703 to a level corresponding to the volume set by the volume 706 to the speaker 27. The voice data ROM 704 stores control data corresponding to the sound number data. The control data corresponding to the sound number data is a collection of data showing the output form of the sound effect or sound in a time series in a predetermined period (for example, the changing period of the effect design).

  FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the operation of the movable member. In the example shown in FIG. 4, the operation of the movable member 78 when the re-change effect (pseudo-continuous effect) in the effect display device 9 is executed is shown. In the re-change effect, the change of the effect symbol is executed for a predetermined period after the change of the effect symbol is started from the state shown in FIG. 4A (the state in which the left, middle, and right effect symbols are stopped) (FIG. 4). (Refer to (B) and (C)), when the predetermined period elapses, the left, middle and right effect symbols are temporarily stopped (see FIG. 4D). When the predetermined temporary stop period elapses, the left middle right effect symbol re-varies (see FIG. 4E), and when the predetermined re-variation period elapses, the left middle right effect symbol is finally stopped (confirmed). (See FIG. 4F). In the example shown in FIG. 4, the movable member 78 operates (operates so as to return to the original position (outside the display screen) after entering the display screen of the effect display device 9) during the first variation period, and the first variation occurs. The movable member 78 also operates during the subsequent re-variation period. In addition, the example shown in FIG. 4 is an example when one temporary stop is performed. Then, after the reach effect is executed, the left, middle, and right effect symbols are finally stopped (confirmed). Here, it has been described that reach is reached when the re-variation effect ends, but when the re-change effect ends, the effect symbol may not be reached but may finally stop.

  Next, the operation of the gaming machine will be described. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the game control microcomputer 560 on the main board 31. When power is supplied to the gaming machine and power supply is started, the input level of the reset terminal to which the reset signal is input becomes high level, and the gaming control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) After executing a security check process, which is a process for confirming whether the contents of the program are valid, the main process after step S1 is started. In the main process, the CPU 56 first performs necessary initial settings.

  In the initial setting process, the CPU 56 first sets the interrupt prohibition (step S1). Next, the interrupt mode is set to interrupt mode 2 (step S2), and a stack pointer designation address is set to the stack pointer (step S3). Then, after initialization of the built-in device (CTC (counter / timer) and PIO (parallel input / output port) which are built-in devices (built-in peripheral circuits)) is performed (step S4), the RAM 55 is accessible. (Step S5). In the interrupt mode 2, the address synthesized from the value (1 byte) of the specific register (I register) built in the CPU 56 and the interrupt vector (1 byte: least significant bit 0) output from the built-in device is This mode indicates an interrupt address.

  Next, the CPU 56 checks the state of the output signal of the clear switch (for example, mounted on the power supply board) input via the input port (step S6). When the on-state is detected in the confirmation, the CPU 56 executes normal initialization processing (steps S10 to S15).

  If the clear switch is not on, check whether data protection processing of the backup RAM area (for example, power supply stop processing such as addition of parity data) was performed when power supply to the gaming machine was stopped (Step S7). When it is confirmed that such protection processing is not performed, the CPU 56 executes initialization processing. Whether there is backup data in the backup RAM area is confirmed, for example, by the state of the backup flag set in the backup RAM area in the power supply stop process.

  When it is confirmed that the power supply stop process has been performed, the CPU 56 performs data check of the backup RAM area (step S8). In this embodiment, a parity check is performed as a data check. Therefore, in step S8, the calculated checksum is compared with the checksum calculated and stored by the same process in the power supply stop process. When the power supply is stopped after an unexpected power failure or the like, the data in the backup RAM area should be saved, so the check result (comparison result) is normal (matched). That the check result is not normal means that the data in the backup RAM area is different from the data when the power supply is stopped. In such a case, since the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, an initialization process that is executed when the power is turned on is not performed when the power supply is stopped.

  If the check result is normal, the CPU 56 recovers the game state restoration process (steps S41 to S43) for returning the internal state of the game control means and the control state of the electrical component control means such as the effect control means to the state when the power supply is stopped. Process). Specifically, the start address of the backup setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set as a pointer (step S41), and the contents of the backup setting table are sequentially set in the work area (area in the RAM 55) (step S42). ). The work area is backed up by a backup power source. In the backup setting table, initialization data for an area that may be initialized in the work area is set. As a result of the processing in steps S41 and S42, the saved contents of the work area that should not be initialized remain as they are. The part that should not be initialized is, for example, data indicating the gaming state before the power supply is stopped (special symbol process flag, probability variation flag, time reduction flag, etc.), and the area where the output state of the output port is saved (output port buffer) ), A portion in which data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls is set.

  Further, the CPU 56 transmits a power failure recovery designation command (power failure recovery 1 designation command) as an initialization command at the time of power supply restoration to the effect control board 80 (step S43). Then, the process proceeds to step S14.

  In this embodiment, it is confirmed whether the data in the backup RAM area is stored using both the backup flag and the check data. However, only one of them may be used. That is, either the backup flag or the check data may be used as an opportunity for executing the game state restoration process.

  In the initialization process, the CPU 56 first performs a RAM clear process (step S10). The RAM clear process initializes predetermined data (for example, count value data of a counter for generating a big hit determination random number) to 0, but is initialized to an arbitrary value or a predetermined value. You may make it do. Alternatively, the entire area of the RAM 55 may not be initialized, and predetermined data (for example, count value data of a counter for generating a big hit determination random number) may be left as it is. Further, the initial address of the initialization setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set as a pointer (step S11), and the contents of the initialization setting table are sequentially set in the work area in the RAM 55 (step S12).

  By the processing in steps S11 and S12, an initial value is set to a flag for selectively performing processing according to the control state, such as a special symbol process flag.

  Further, the CPU 56 initializes a sub board (a board on which a microcomputer other than the main board 31 is mounted) (a command indicating that the game control microcomputer 560 has executed an initialization process). Is also transmitted to the effect control board 80 (step S13). For example, when the effect control microcomputer 100 mounted on the effect control board 80 receives the initialization designation command, the effect display device 9 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized. Display, that is, initialization notification. In the initialization process, the CPU 56 also transmits a customer waiting demonstration designation (demonstration) command.

  Further, the CPU 56 executes a random number circuit setting process for initial setting of the random number circuit 503 (step S14). For example, the CPU 56 performs setting according to the random number circuit setting program to cause the random number circuit 503 to update the value of the random R.

  Then, the CPU 56 sets a CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 560 so that a timer interrupt is periodically taken every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S15). That is, a value corresponding to, for example, 2 ms is set in a predetermined register (time constant register) as an initial value. In this embodiment, it is assumed that a timer interrupt is periodically taken every 2 ms.

  When the execution of the initialization process (steps S10 to S15) is completed, the CPU 56 repeatedly executes the display random number update process (step S17) and the initial value random number update process (step S18) in the main process. When executing the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process, the interrupt disabled state is set (step S16). When the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process are finished, the interrupt enabled state is set. Set (step S19). In this embodiment, the display random number is a random number for determining a variation pattern or the like, and the display random number update process is a process for updating the count value of the counter for generating the display random number. . The initial value random number update process is a process for updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number. In this embodiment, the initial value random number is an initial value of a count value such as a counter for generating a random number for determining whether or not to hit a normal symbol (normal symbol determination random number generation counter). It is a random number for determining. A game control process for controlling the progress of the game, which will be described later (the game control microcomputer 560 controls game devices such as a variable display device, a variable winning ball device, a ball payout device, etc. provided in the game machine itself. In a process for transmitting a command signal to cause another microcomputer to control, or a game device control process), the count value of the random number generation counter for jackpot determination or the like is one round (minimum value that can be taken by random numbers) When the value is incremented by the number of values between the value and the maximum value), an initial value is set in the counter.

  When the timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 56 executes the timer interrupt process in steps S20 to S34 shown in FIG. In the timer interrupt process, first, a power-off detection process for detecting whether or not a power-off signal is output (whether or not an on-state is turned on) is executed (step S20). The power-off signal is output, for example, when the power monitoring circuit 920 mounted on the power board detects a decrease in the voltage of the power supplied to the gaming machine. In the power-off detection process, when detecting that the power-off signal has been output, the CPU 56 executes a power supply stop process for saving necessary data in the backup RAM area. Next, detection signals from the gate switch 32a, the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, the count switch 23, and the winning port switches 29a, 30a, 33a, and 39a are input via the input driver circuit 58, These state determinations are performed (switch processing: step S21).

  Next, the CPU 56 has a first special symbol display 8a, a second special symbol display 8b, a normal symbol display 10, a first special symbol hold storage display 18a, a second special symbol hold storage display 18b, a normal symbol. A display control process for controlling the display of the on-hold storage display 41 is executed (step S22). About the 1st special symbol display 8a, the 2nd special symbol display 8b, and the normal symbol display 10, a drive signal is output with respect to each display according to the content of the output buffer set by step S32, S33. Execute control.

  Further, a process of updating the count value of each counter for generating each random number for determination such as a random number for determining a normal winning symbol used for game control is performed (determination random number update process: step S23). The CPU 56 further performs a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number and the display random number (initial value random number update process, display random number update process: steps S24 and S25).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs special symbol process processing (step S26). In the special symbol process, corresponding processing is executed according to a special symbol process flag for controlling the first special symbol indicator 8a, the second special symbol indicator 8b, and the special winning award in a predetermined order. The CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag according to the gaming state.

  Next, normal symbol process processing is performed (step S27). In the normal symbol process, the CPU 56 executes a corresponding process according to the normal symbol process flag for controlling the display state of the normal symbol display 10 in a predetermined order. The CPU 56 updates the value of the normal symbol process flag according to the gaming state.

  Further, the CPU 56 performs a process of sending an effect control command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (effect control command control process: step S28).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs information output processing for outputting data such as jackpot information, start information, probability variation information supplied to the hall management computer, for example (step S29).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs prize ball processing for setting the number of prize balls based on detection signals from the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, the count switch 23, and the winning port switches 29a, 30a, 33a, 39a. Execute (Step S30). Specifically, the payout control is performed in accordance with winning detection based on any one of the first starting port switch 13a, the second starting port switch 14a, the count switch 23, and the winning port switches 29a, 30a, 33a, 39a being turned on. A payout control command (award ball number signal) indicating the number of winning balls is output to a payout control microcomputer mounted on the substrate 37. The payout control microcomputer drives the ball payout device 97 in response to a payout control command indicating the number of winning balls.

  In this embodiment, a RAM area (output port buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port is provided. However, the CPU 56 relates to on / off of the solenoid in the RAM area corresponding to the output state of the output port. The contents are output to the output port (step S31: output process).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs special symbol display control processing for setting special symbol display control data for effect display of the special symbol in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data according to the value of the special symbol process flag ( Step S32). For example, if the variation speed is 1 frame / 0.2 seconds until the end flag is set when the start flag set in the special symbol process is set, the CPU 56, for example, every 0.2 seconds passes. Then, the value of the display control data set in the output buffer is incremented by one. Further, the CPU 56 outputs a drive signal in step S22 in accordance with the display control data set in the output buffer, whereby the first special symbol display unit 8a and the second special symbol display unit 8b Variable display of the second special symbol is executed.

  Further, the CPU 56 performs a normal symbol display control process for setting normal symbol display control data for effect display of the normal symbol in an output buffer for setting the normal symbol display control data according to the value of the normal symbol process flag ( Step S33). For example, when the start flag related to the variation of the normal symbol is set, the CPU 56 switches the display state (“◯” and “×”) for the variation rate of the normal symbol every 0.2 seconds until the end flag is set. With such a speed, the value of the display control data set in the output buffer (for example, 1 indicating “◯” and 0 indicating “x”) is switched every 0.2 seconds. Further, the CPU 56 outputs a normal signal on the normal symbol display 10 by outputting a drive signal in step S22 according to the display control data set in the output buffer.

  Thereafter, the interrupt permission state is set (step S34), and the process is terminated.

  With the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is started every 2 ms. The game control process corresponds to the processes in steps S21 to S33 (excluding step S29) in the timer interrupt process. In this embodiment, the game control process is executed by the timer interrupt process. However, in the timer interrupt process, for example, only a flag indicating that an interrupt has occurred is set, and the game control process is performed by the main process. May be executed.

  FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing a pseudo continuous chance. In the “pseudo-continuous” specific effect, in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R in the effect display device 9, the pseudo-continuous chance eyes GC1 to GC8 shown in FIG. The effect symbols constituting any of the above are temporarily stopped and displayed. The “left symbol” is an effect symbol displayed (stop display or temporary stop display) in the “left” symbol display area 9L, and the “middle symbol” is an effect symbol displayed in the “medium” symbol display area 9C. The “right symbol” is an effect symbol displayed in the “right” symbol display area 9R. The pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 may be determined in advance as a combination of effect symbols included in the special combination.

  When the shifted symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b and the effect display device 9, the variable display state of the effect symbol is started after the variable display of the effect symbol is started. There may be a case where a predetermined combination of effects that does not reach reach is stopped and displayed without reaching reach. Such a variable display mode of the effect symbol is referred to as a variable display mode of “non-reach” (also referred to as “normally shift”) in a case where the variable display result is a loss symbol.

  When the shifted symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b and the effect display device 9, the variable display state of the effect symbol is started after the variable display of the effect symbol is started. Depending on the reach state, after the reach effect is executed, or when the reach effect is not executed, a combination of predetermined effect symbols that do not become reach may be stopped and displayed. Such a variable display result of the effect design is referred to as a variable display mode of “reach” (also referred to as “reach out”) when the variable display result is “out of”.

  In this embodiment, when the big win symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b, the reach effect is executed after the variable display state of the effect symbol becomes the reach state. Or the reach effect is not executed, and the effect symbols are all stopped and displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R on the effect display device 9.

  When “5”, which is a small hit symbol, is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b, the effect display variable display mode of the effect display device 9 is “accurate”. After the effect symbols are variably displayed as in a case, a predetermined non-reach combination (for example, the stop symbols in the “left” and “right” symbol display areas 9L and 9R do not match) In some cases, the stop symbol that is displayed is stopped or a stop symbol that is a predetermined reach combination is stopped. A display effect in the effect display device 9 corresponding to the fact that “5” as a small hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b, and a variable display mode of “small hit”. .

  FIG. 8 shows the variation patterns of the production symbols prepared in advance corresponding to the cases where the variable display mode of the production symbol is “non-reach” and “reach” when the variable display result is an out-of-game symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows. As shown in FIG. 8, in this embodiment, non-reach PA1-1 to non-reach PA1-5 and non-reach PB1- are the variation patterns corresponding to the case where the variable display mode of the effect symbol is “non-reach”. 1 and non-reach PB1-2, non-reach PC1-1 and non-reach PC1-2 variation patterns are prepared. In addition, normal PA2-1 to normal PA2-4, super PA3-1 to super PA3-6, super PB3-1 to super PB3- 3. Fluctuation patterns of Super PC 3-1 to Super PC 3-4 are prepared. In addition, as shown in FIG. 8, about the fluctuation pattern of non-reach PA1-5 which is used when not reaching and has a pseudo-continuous effect, re-change is performed twice. Re-variation is performed twice or three times for a variation pattern that is used for reaching and accompanied by a pseudo-continuous effect.

  FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram exemplifying a variation pattern of a production symbol prepared in advance corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a big hit symbol or a small hit symbol. As shown in FIG. 9, in this embodiment, normal PA2-5 to normal PA2-8 and super PA4-1 are used as variation patterns corresponding to the case where the variable symbol display result of the special symbol is a big hit symbol or a small hit symbol. ~ Super PA4-6, Super PA5-1 to Super PA5-3, Super PB4-1 to Super PB4-3, Super PB5-1 to Super PB5-3, Super PD1-1 and Super PD1-2, Super PE1-1 Also, variation patterns of super PE1-2, special PG1-1 to special PG1-3, special PG2-1 to special PG2-3 are prepared. In addition, as shown in FIG. 9, re-variation is performed twice, three times, or four times for a variation pattern that is used when it is not abrupt and is accompanied by pseudo-continuous effects. For the variation pattern of the special PG1-3 used in the case of suddenness and accompanied by pseudo-rendition, re-variation is performed twice or three times.

FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. Each random number is used as follows.
(2-1) Random 2-1 (MR2-1): Determines the type of jackpot (probability big hit, sudden probability change big hit, normal big hit) (for jackpot type determination)
(2-2) Random 2-2 (MR2-2): Determines whether or not to reach (for reach determination)
(3) Random 3 (MR3): The type (type) of the variation pattern is determined (for variation pattern type determination)
(4) Random 4 (MR4): A variation pattern (variation time) is determined (for variation pattern determination)
(5) Random 5 (MR5): Determines whether or not to generate a hit based on the normal symbol (for normal symbol hit determination)
(6) Random 6 (MR6): Determine the initial value of random 5 (for determining the initial value of random 5)
(7) Random 7 (MR7): Determines the pattern of pseudo-continuous production (for determining pseudo-continuous pattern)

  In step S23 in the game control process shown in FIG. 6, the game control microcomputer 560 generates (2-1) a big hit type determination random number and (5) a normal symbol determination random number. The counter is incremented (added by 1). That is, they are determination random numbers, and other random numbers are display random numbers (random 2-2, random 3, random 4, random 7) or initial value random numbers (random 6). In addition, in order to improve a game effect, you may use random numbers other than said random number. In this embodiment, a random number generated by hardware incorporated in the game control microcomputer 560 (or hardware external to the game control microcomputer 560) is used as the jackpot determination random number.

  FIGS. 11A and 11B are explanatory diagrams showing a jackpot determination table. The jackpot determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 54 and is a table in which a jackpot determination value to be compared with the random R is set. The jackpot determination table includes a normal-time jackpot determination table used in a normal state (a gaming state that is not a probability change state) and a probability change jackpot determination table used in a probability change state. Each numerical value described in the left column of FIG. 11 (A) and each numerical value described in FIG. 11 (B) are set in the normal time big hit determination table. Each numerical value described in the right column of (A) and each numerical value described in FIG. 11 (B) are set. The numerical values described in FIGS. 11A and 11B are the big hit determination value or the small hit determination value. Hereinafter, the big hit determination value and the small hit determination value may be collectively expressed as “big hit determination value”.

  The CPU 56 extracts the count value of the random number circuit 503 at a predetermined time and uses the extracted value as the value of the big hit determination random number (random R). If it matches any of the big hit judgment values shown in B), it is decided to make a big hit (probability big hit, normal big hit or sudden big hit) or small hit for the special symbol. Note that the “probability” shown in FIGS. 11A and 11B indicates the probability (ratio) of big hit or small hit. Further, determining whether or not to make a big hit or a small hit means determining whether or not to shift to the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state, but the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display. It may also be determined whether the stop symbol in the symbol display 8b is a big hit symbol or a small hit symbol.

  FIG. 11C is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot type determination table 131 stored in the ROM 54. When it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol, the jackpot type determination table 131 determines the jackpot type as “normal jackpot”, “based on the random number (random 2-1) for determining the jackpot type. This table is referred to in order to determine either “probable big hit” or “surprise big hit”. The big hit type determination table 131 is a numerical value to be compared with the value of the random 2-1, and corresponding to each of “normal big hit”, “probability big hit”, and “crash big hit” (big hit type determination value) Is set. When the random value 2-1 matches any of the jackpot type determination values, the CPU 56 determines the jackpot type as a type corresponding to the matched jackpot type determination value.

  12A to 12F and FIG. 13G are explanatory diagrams showing the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132G. The jackpot variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132G, when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol, the variation pattern type is determined according to the determination result of the jackpot type, and a random number for determining the variation pattern type. It is a table that is referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of types based on (Random 3). Each of the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132G is selected according to a table selection rule as shown in FIG. In other words, the game state is selected according to whether the game state is the normal state, the probability variation state, or the short time state, and the determination result of the jackpot type.

  In each of the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132G, a random number (random 3) for determining the fluctuation pattern type is determined depending on whether the determination result of the big hit type is “normal”, “probability variation”, or “probability”. ) And a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with normal CA3-1, super CA3-2 to super CA3-6, super CB3-1, super CB3-2, special CA4-1, and special CA4-2. A determination value corresponding to one of the variation pattern types of special CB4-1, special CB4-2, special CC4-1, and special CC4-2 is set.

  For example, when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal state, the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132A shown in FIG. 12A used when the big hit type is “normal” and the big hit type is “ The allocation of determination values for the variation pattern types of normal CA3-1 and super CA3-2 is different from the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132B shown in FIG. In the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132A, a determination value is assigned to the variation pattern type of the super CA3-3, and in the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132B, the variation value type of the super CA3-3. The judgment value is not assigned. Further, in the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132A, no determination value is assigned to the variation pattern type of the super CA 3-4, and in the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132B, the variation pattern type of the super CA 3-4 Judgment value is assigned.

  As described above, when the gaming state is one of the normal state, the probability variation state, and the short-time state, the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132C selected according to the big hit type in the gaming state (when in the normal state) When the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132D to 132F (selected when the probability variation state is selected) and the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A, 132B and 132G (selected during the short time state) are compared, Accordingly, the assignment of the judgment value to each variation pattern type is different. Also, determination values are assigned to different variation pattern types depending on the jackpot type. Therefore, different variation pattern types can be determined according to the determination result of whether the big hit type is a plurality of types, and the ratio determined for the same variation pattern type can be varied.

  Further, in the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132C, 132F, 132G used when the big hit type is “surprise”, for example, special CA4-1, special CA4-2, special CB4-1, special CB4-2, When the big hit type such as special CC4-1 or special CC4-2 is other than “surprise”, the determination value is assigned to the variation pattern type to which the determination value is not assigned. Therefore, when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type becomes “surprise”, when the control is made to the two round big hit state, the variation pattern type is different from the case of controlling to the 15 round big hit state. be able to.

  When the big hit type is determined to be “normal”, the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132A shown in FIG. 12A used when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal state or the short time state. With the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132E shown in FIG. 12D used when the gaming state is a probable variation state, the determination values are assigned to the variation pattern types of normal CA3-1 and super CA3-2. Is different. In the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132A, a determination value is assigned to the variation pattern type of the super CA3-3, and in the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132D, a determination value is assigned to the variation pattern type of the super CA3-3. It is not done. As described above, when the big hit type is determined to be “normal”, “probability change”, or “surprise change”, the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A and 132D (“normal”) selected according to the gaming state. ), The big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132B and 132E (selected when “probability change”), and the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132C, 132F and 132G (selected when “probability”) are compared. Depending on whether the gaming state is a normal state, a short time state, or a probable variation state, the determination value is assigned to each variation pattern type differently. In addition, determination values may be assigned to different variation pattern types depending on the gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to determine different variation pattern types depending on whether the gaming state is a normal state, a short-time state or a probable variation state, and the ratio determined for the same variation pattern type can be varied. it can.

  FIGS. 14A to 14C are explanatory diagrams showing small hit variation pattern type determination tables 133A to 133C stored in the ROM 54. FIG. In the small hit variation pattern type determination tables 133A to 133C, when it is determined that the variable display result is a small hit symbol, the variation pattern type is based on the random number (random 3) for determining the variation pattern type. It is a table referred to in order to determine any of a plurality of types. Each of the small hit variation pattern type determination tables 133A to 133C is selected according to a table selection rule as shown in FIG. That is, the game state is selected according to whether it is a normal state, a probability change state, or a time-short state. Each of the small hit variation pattern type determination tables 133A to 133C is a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with a random number (random 3) value for variation pattern type determination, and includes special CA4-1, special CB4-1, The judgment value corresponding to one of the variation pattern types of the special CC4-1 is included.

  The variation pattern type of special CA4-1 is assigned with a determination value in the variation pattern type determination table 133A for small hits shown in FIG. 14A, and is used for the big hit for sudden hitting shown in FIG. A determination value is also assigned in the variation pattern type determination table 132C. Further, the variation pattern type of the special CB4-1 is assigned a determination value in the small hit variation pattern type determination table 133B shown in FIG. 14 (B), and is also used for sudden hitting as shown in FIG. 12 (F). A determination value is also assigned in the variation pattern type determination table 132F. The variation pattern type of the special CC 4-1 is assigned a determination value in the small hit variation pattern type determination table 133C shown in FIG. 14C, and is also used for sudden hitting as shown in FIG. 13G. A determination value is also assigned in the variation pattern type determination table 132G. As described above, the variation pattern types of the special CA 4-1, the special CB 4-1, and the special CC 4-1 are common variations when the big hit type is “surprise” and when the variable display result is “small hit”. It is a pattern type. That is, the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132C shown in FIG. 12 (C), the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132F shown in FIG. 12 (F), and FIG. The big hit variation pattern type determination table 132G shown in G) is set so as to include a variation pattern type that is common to the variation pattern type determined when the variable display result is “small hit”.

  FIGS. 15A to 15C are explanatory diagrams showing reach determination tables 134A to 134C stored in the ROM 54. FIG. The reach determination tables 134A to 134C indicate whether or not to change the variable display state of the effect symbol to the reach state when it is determined that the variable display result is “off”. -2) is a table referred to for determination based on the above. Each of the reach determination tables 134A to 134C is selected according to a table selection rule as shown in FIG. That is, the game state is selected according to whether it is a normal state, a probability change state, or a time-short state. Each of the reach determination tables 134A to 134C is a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the random number for reach determination (random 2-2), and is non-reach HA1-1 to non-reach HA1-5, non-reach HB1. −1, non-reach HB1-2, non-reach HC1-1, non-reach HC1-2, the determination result indicating that the reach state is not reached, reach HA2-1 to reach HA2-3, reach HB2-1, reach HC2-1 The determination value corresponding to any of the determination results indicating the reach state is included.

  For example, in the setting of the reach determination table 134A shown in FIG. 15A, the value in the range of “1” to “204” is set to the non-reach HA 1-1 corresponding to the case where the number of reserved storage is “0”. Assigned, a value in the range of “205” to “239” is assigned to the reach HA 2-1. Corresponding to the case where the number of reserved memories is “1”, a value in the range of “1” to “217” that is larger than the number of determination values assigned to the non-reach HA 1-1 is assigned to the non-reach HA 1-2. It has been. A value in the range of “1” to “220”, which is larger than the number of determination values assigned to the non-reach HA 1-1 and the non-reach HA 1-2 corresponding to the case where the number of reserved storage is “2”, is non-reach. Assigned to HA1-3. Corresponding to the case where the number of reserved memories is “3” or “4”, “1” to “1”, which are larger than the number of determination values assigned to each of the non-reach HA 1-1 to non-reach HA 1-3. 230 ”is assigned to non-reach HA1-4. Corresponding to the case where the number of reserved memories is “5” to “8”, “1” to “235”, which is larger than the number of determination values assigned to each of the non-reach HA 1-1 to non-reach HA 1-4. A range determination value is assigned to non-reach HA 1-5. With such a setting, when the number of reserved memories is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (for example, “3”), it is determined that the variable display state of the effect symbol is set to the reach state as compared to when the number is less than the predetermined number. The ratio is lower. If the average special symbol variation time in the variation pattern corresponding to “non-reach” is set to be shorter than the average special symbol variation time in the variation pattern corresponding to “reach”. When the number of reserved memories is equal to or greater than the predetermined number, the average special symbol variation time can be shortened compared to when the number is less than the predetermined number.

  FIGS. 16A to 16C are explanatory diagrams showing reach variation pattern type determination tables 135 </ b> A to 135 </ b> C stored in the ROM 54. The reach variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C indicate the change pattern type based on the random number (random 3) for determining the change pattern type when it is determined that the variable display state of the effect symbol is set to the reach state. Is a table that is referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of types. Each of the reach variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C is selected as a use table in accordance with a determination result indicating reach state such as reach HA2-1 to reach HA2-3, reach HB2-1, reach HC2-1. The That is, the reach variation pattern type determination table 135A is selected as a use table according to the determination result indicating reach HA2-1 to reach HA2-3, and for reach according to the determination result indicating reach HB2-1. The variation pattern type determination table 135B is selected as the use table, and the reach variation pattern type determination table 135C is selected as the use table according to the determination result indicating that the reach HC2-1 is selected. Each of the reach variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C has a determination result indicating that the reach state is set to reach HA2-1 to reach HA2-3, reach HB2-1, or reach HC2-1. A numerical value (determination value) to be compared with a random number (random 3) value for determining the variation pattern type, which is normal CA2-1, super CA2-2, super CA2-3, super CB2-1, super CB2-2. Data (determination value) for determining any of the fluctuation pattern types.

  For example, in the reach variation pattern type determination table 135A shown in FIG. 16A, the value (determination value) in the range of “1” to “128” corresponds to the determination result indicating that the reach is HA2-1. It is assigned to the variation pattern type of normal CA2-1, and other values are assigned to the variation pattern types of super CA2-2 and super CA2-3. Corresponding to the determination result to reach reach 2-2, a value in the range of “1” to “170” is assigned to the variation pattern type of normal CA2-1. Further, in response to the determination result that the reach HA2-3 is selected, a value in the range of “1” to “182” is assigned to the variation pattern type of the normal CA2-1. The reach HA 2-1 is compared with the value of the random number for reach determination (random 2-2) according to the reach determination table 134A shown in FIG. The judgment value to be assigned is assigned. A determination value is assigned to the reach HA 2-2 corresponding to the case where the number of reserved storage is “1” or “2”. The reach HA2-3 is assigned a determination value corresponding to the case where the number of reserved storage is “3” to “8”. With these settings, the fluctuation pattern of the normal CA 2-1 in which the “normal” reach effect is executed when the number of reserved memories is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (for example, “1”) compared to when the number is less than the predetermined number. The rate determined for the type increases. And, the variation time of the average special symbol in the variation pattern that executes the “normal” reach effect is shorter than the variation time of the average special symbol in the variation pattern that executes the reach effect other than “normal”. If the number of reserved memories is greater than or equal to a predetermined number, the average special symbol variation time can be shortened compared to when the number is less than the predetermined number.

  17A to 17C are explanatory diagrams showing non-reach variation pattern type determination tables 136A to 136C stored in the ROM 54. FIG. The non-reach variation pattern type determination tables 136A to 136C indicate the variation pattern based on the random number (random 3) for determining the variation pattern type when it is determined that the variable display state of the effect symbol is not set to the reach state. It is a table referred in order to determine the type as one of a plurality of types. The non-reach variation pattern type determination tables 136A to 136C are non-reach HA1-1 to non-reach HA1-5, non-reach HB1-1, non-reach HB1-2, non-reach HC1-1, non-reach HC1-2, and the like. The table is selected as a use table according to the determination result indicating that the reach state is not set. That is, the non-reach variation pattern type determination table 136A is selected as a use table according to the determination results of the non-reach HA1-1 to non-reach HA1-5, and the determination results of the non-reach HB1-1 and the non-reach HB1-2. Accordingly, the non-reach variation pattern type determination table 136B is selected as the use table, and the non-reach variation pattern type determination table 136C is selected as the use table according to the determination results of the non-reach HC1-1 and non-reach HC1-2. The In each of the non-reach variation pattern type determination tables 136A to 136C, the determination result indicating that the non-reach state is not set is non-reach HA1-1 to non-reach HA1-5, non-reach HB1-1, non-reach HB1-2, non-reach HC1. -1 and non-reach HC1-2, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with a random number (random 3) for determining the variation pattern type, and non-reach CA1-1 to non-reach HC1-2 It includes data (determination value) corresponding to any of the variation pattern types of reach CA1-4, non-reach CB1-1 to non-reach CB1-3, non-reach CC1-1 to non-reach CC1-3.

  FIGS. 18, 19A and 19B are explanatory diagrams showing hit variation pattern determination tables 137A to 137C stored in the ROM 54. FIG. The hit variation pattern determination tables 137A to 137C determine the variation pattern according to the determination result of the big hit type or the variation pattern type when it is determined that the variable display result is “big hit” or “small hit”. This is a table that is referred to in order to determine a variation pattern as one of a plurality of types based on a random number (random 4). Each of the variation pattern determination tables 137A to 137C is selected as a usage table according to the determination result of the variation pattern type. That is, the hit variation pattern determination table 137A is selected as the usage table in accordance with the determination result that the variation pattern type is either normal CA3-1 or super CA3-2 to super CA3-6, and the variation pattern type is selected as the super table. The hit variation pattern determination table 137B is selected as a use table in accordance with the determination result to select one of CB3-1 to super CB3-2, and the variation pattern type is special CA4-1, special CA4-2, special CB4-. 1, the hit variation pattern determination table 137C is selected as the use table in accordance with the determination result indicating that any one of the special CB4-2, the special CC4-1, and the special CC4-2 is selected. Each hit variation pattern determination table 137A to 137C is a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of random number (random 4) for variation pattern determination according to the variation pattern type, and the variable display result of the effect symbol is Data (determination value) corresponding to any of a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to the case of “big hit” or “small hit” is included.

  FIGS. 20 and 21 are explanatory diagrams showing the deviation variation pattern determination tables 138A and 138B stored in the ROM 54. FIG. The deviation variation pattern determination tables 138A and 138B determine the variation pattern according to whether or not to reach the reach state and the determination result of the variation pattern type when it is determined that the variable display result is “out of range”. This is a table that is referred to in order to determine a variation pattern as one of a plurality of types based on a random number (random 4). Each deviation variation pattern determination table 138A, 138B is selected as a usage table according to the determination result of the variation pattern type. That is, the determination result that the variation pattern type is any one of non-reach CA1-1 to non-reach CA1-4, non-reach CB1-1 to non-reach CB1-3, non-reach CC1-1 to non-reach CC1-3. Accordingly, the deviation variation pattern determination table 138A is selected as the usage table, and the variation pattern type is any one of normal CA2-1, super CA2-2, super CA2-3, super CB2-1, and super CB2-2. Depending on the determination result, the deviation variation pattern determination table 138B is selected as the usage table.

  The deviation variation pattern determination table 138A is a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the random number (random 4) for variation pattern determination according to the variation pattern type. And data (determination value) for determining one of a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to the case where the variable display mode is “non-reach”. The deviation variation pattern determination table 138B is a numerical value (determination value) that is compared with the value of the random number (random 4) for variation pattern determination according to the variation pattern type. And data (determination value) for determining one of a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to the case where the variable display mode is “reach”.

  The non-reach PA1-4 to non-reach PA1-5 correspond to the non-reach variation pattern types such as non-reach CA1-4 and non-reach CC1-3 in the loss variation pattern determination table 138A shown in FIG. A numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of a random number (random 4) for determining the variation pattern is assigned to the variation pattern (see FIG. 8) for executing the specific effect. With such a setting, non-reach PA1-4 to non-reach corresponds to the determination that the variable display result of the effect symbol is “out” and the determination that the variable display state of the effect symbol is not the reach state. Making a decision to be one of the fluctuation patterns of reach PA1-5 and executing a specific effect (effect of non-reach PA1-4 ("slip") or effect of non-reach PA1-5 ("pseudo-run")) Can do.

  Also, it is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of non-reach PB1-1 corresponding to the fluctuation pattern type of non-reach CB1-1, and assigned to the fluctuation pattern of non-reach PB1-2 corresponding to the fluctuation pattern type of non-reach CB1-2. It has been.

  Then, with respect to the variation pattern types of non-reach CA1-4 including non-reach PA1-5, a random number (random 3 for determining the variation pattern type) in the non-reach variation pattern type determination table 136A shown in FIG. ), Which is a numerical value (determination value) to be compared, a determination value in the range of “217” to “241” is assigned to the non-reach HA 1-1, and “230” to the non-reach HA 1-2. ”To“ 241 ”are assigned, determination values in the range of“ 231 ”to“ 241 ”are assigned to the non-reach HA1-3, and“ 237 ”to the non-reach HA1-4. A determination value in the range of “241” is assigned, and a determination value in the range of “237” to “241” is assigned to the non-reach HA 1-5. Further, for the non-reach HA 1-1, the reach determination random number (random 2-2) corresponding to the case where the number of reserved storage is “0” in the reach determination table 134A shown in FIG. A determination value in the range of “1” to “204” is assigned. For the non-reach HA1-2, in the reach determination table 134A, the reserved storage number corresponds to “1” and is a numerical value (determination value) that is compared with the value of the random number for determination of reach (random 2-2). Thus, determination values in the range of “1” to “217” are assigned. For the non-reach HA1-3, in the reach determination table 134A, the reserved storage number corresponds to “2” and is a numerical value (determination value) that is compared with the value of the random number for reach determination (random 2-2). Thus, determination values in the range of “1” to “220” are assigned. For the non-reach HA1-4, in the reach determination table 134A, the numbers to be compared with the values of the random numbers for reach determination (random 2-2) corresponding to the numbers of reserved storage “3” and “4” ( Determination value) and a determination value in the range of “1” to “230” is assigned, and for the non-reach HA1-4, the reserved storage number is “5” to “8” in the reach determination table 134A. Is a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of a random number for reach determination (random 2-2), and a determination value in the range of “1” to “235” is assigned. Accordingly, when the number of reserved memories is “1” or “2”, the ratio determined as the variation pattern type of non-reach CA1-4 is lower than when the number of reserved memories is “0”. . Further, when the reserved storage number is “3” or “4”, the non-reach CA1-4 is compared to the case where the reserved storage number is “0” or “1” or “2”. The ratio determined for the variation pattern type becomes lower. Further, when the number of reserved memories is “5” to “8”, non-reach PA 1-5 (including “pseudo-continuous”) is compared with the case where the number of reserved memories is “0” to “4”. The ratio determined for the variation pattern type of non-reach CA1-4 including the lower becomes lower.

  In addition, in the non-reach variation pattern type determination table 136C shown in FIG. 17C, the reach type is not the non-reach CC1-3 variation pattern type including the non-reach PA 1-5 (see FIG. 20). In the case of the reach HC1-1, a determination value in the range of “235” to “241” (a numerical value to be compared with the random number (random 3) for determining the variation pattern type) is assigned, and the reach type is non-reach. In the case of HC1-2, determination values in the range of “234” to “241” are assigned. Further, in the reach determination table 134C shown in FIG. 15C, the determination value (random number for reach determination (random 2-2) assigned to the non-reach HC 1-1 when the reserved storage number is “2” or more. ) And the number of determination values assigned to the non-reach HC 1-2 when the reserved storage number is “0” or “1” (“1”). ”To“ 231 ”). In the non-reach variation pattern type determination table 136C shown in FIG. 17C, in the case of non-reach HC1-1, the non-reach HC1 than the determination value assigned to the non-reach CC1-3 variation pattern type. In the case of -2, since the number of determination values assigned to the variation pattern type of the non-reach CC1-3 is smaller, when the number of reserved memories is "2" or more, the number of reserved memories is " Compared to the case of “0” or “1”, the ratio determined for the variation pattern type of non-reach CC1-3 including non-reach PA1-5 (including “pseudo-continuous”) is lower.

  Note that, when the deviation variation pattern determination table 138A illustrated in FIG. 20 is used, only non-reach PA1-5 can be selected as a variation pattern including “pseudo-continuous”, but a plurality of types including “pseudo-continuous” can be selected. The shift variation pattern determination table 138A may be configured so that the variation pattern can be selected.

  In the variation pattern illustrated in FIG. 8, the variation time of the special symbol in the variation pattern of the non-reach PA1-1 in which the specific effect is not executed is 5.75 seconds, and the variation time of the special symbol in the variation pattern of the non-reach PA1-2. Is 3.75 seconds, and the variation time of the special symbol in the variation pattern of the non-reach PA1-3 is 1.50 seconds. On the other hand, the variation time of the special symbol in the variation pattern of the non-reach PA1-4 in which the “slip” specific effect is executed is 8.25 seconds, and the non-reach in which the “pseudo-continuous” specific effect is executed. The variation time of the special symbol in the variation pattern of PA1-5 is 16.70 seconds. That is, the variation time of the special symbol in the variation pattern in which the specific effect is executed corresponding to “non-reach” is longer than the variation time of the special symbol in the variation pattern in which the specific effect is not executed. When the number of reserved memories is “1” or more, the ratio determined as the variation pattern type of the non-reach CA 1-4 that executes the specific effect is lower than when it is “0”. In addition, when the number of reserved storage is “3” or more, the ratio determined as the variation pattern type of non-reach CA1-4 is lower than when the number is less than “3”. Therefore, when the number of reserved memories is equal to or greater than the predetermined number, the average special symbol variation time can be shortened compared to when the number is less than the predetermined number.

  In the deviation variation pattern determination table 138B shown in FIG. 21, the variation pattern for executing the “normal” reach effect such as the normal PA2-1 to the normal PA2-4, corresponding to the variation pattern type of the normal CA2-1. A numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of a random number (random 4) for determining the variation pattern is assigned. Corresponding to the case of the change pattern type of super CA2-2, the change pattern for executing reach effect α1 such as super PA3-1 to super PA3-3, or the reach effect such as super PA3-4 to super PA3-6. A numerical value (determination value) to be compared with a random number (random 4) for determining the variation pattern is assigned to the variation pattern for executing α2. Corresponding to the case where the variation pattern type is super CA2-3 or super CB2-1, random numbers for variation pattern determination (random 4) are added to the variation patterns for executing the reach effect β1 such as super PB3-1 to super PB3-3. ) Is assigned a numerical value (judgment value) to be compared.

  Further, for example, for a variation pattern that executes a specific effect of “pseudo-continuous”, such as a variation pattern of super PA3-3, super PA3-6, and super PB3-3, the effect design after the pseudo-continuous variation is performed. The variation pattern type is classified according to the type of effect operation in the reach effect that is executed based on the fact that the variable display state becomes the reach state. That is, since the fluctuation pattern of the super PA 3-3 is a fluctuation pattern for executing the reach effect α1, it corresponds to the case of the fluctuation pattern type of the super CA 2-2 in the deviation fluctuation pattern determination table 138B shown in FIG. Thus, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the random number (random 4) for determining the variation pattern is assigned. Since the variation pattern of the super PA 3-6 is a variation pattern for executing the reach effect α2, the variation pattern determination table 138B corresponds to the variation pattern type of the super CA 2-2 in the variation pattern determination table 138B. A numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of random number (random 4) is assigned. Since the variation pattern of the super PB3-3 is a variation pattern for executing the reach effect β1, the variation pattern type of the super CA2-3 or the super CB2-1 in the outlier variation pattern determination table 138B corresponds to the variation pattern type. A numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of a random number (random 4) for determining the variation pattern is assigned.

  22 and 23 are explanatory diagrams showing a pseudo-continuous effect pattern determination table 140 stored in the ROM 54. FIG. FIG. 22 shows a variation pattern used at the time of loss, and FIG. 23 shows a variation pattern used at the time of hit. The pseudo-continuous effect pattern determination table 140 includes super PA3-3, super PA3-6, super PB3-3, super PA4-3, super PA4-6, super PA5-3, super PB4, which are fluctuation patterns with pseudo-continuous. -3, super PB5-3, and special PG1-3 (see FIGS. 8 and 9) are set. The determination value corresponds to a specific variation pattern. Note that there are a plurality of super PA3-3, super PA3-6, super PB3-3, super PA4-3, super PA4-6, super PA5-3, super PB4-3, super PB5-3, and special PG1-3. There are fluctuation patterns of the number of re-variations, but for non-reach PA1-5, the number of re-variations (number of pseudo-variations) including the initial variation (the first pseudo variation) is only one type of two. No judgment value is assigned. That is, in practice, in the pseudo-continuous effect pattern determination table 140, data regarding non-reach PA1-5 is not set.

  FIG. 24 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560. In the example shown in FIG. 24, the command 80XX (H) is an effect control command (variation pattern command) for designating a variation pattern of the effect symbol that is variably displayed on the effect display device 9 in response to the variable display of the special symbol. (Each corresponding to a variation pattern XX). That is, when a unique number is assigned to each of the usable variation patterns shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, there is a variation pattern command corresponding to each variation pattern specified by the number. “(H)” indicates a hexadecimal number. The effect control command for designating the variation pattern is also a command for designating the start of variation. Therefore, upon receiving the command 80XX (H), the effect control microcomputer 100 controls the first decorative symbol display 9a or the second decorative symbol display 9b so as to start the decorative symbol variable display, and the effect display device. In step 9, control is performed so as to start variable display of effect symbols.

  The commands 8C01 (H) to 8C05 (H) are effect control commands indicating whether or not to make a big hit and the type of the big hit game. The production control microcomputer 100 determines the display results of the decorative symbols and the production symbols in response to the reception of the commands 8C01 (H) to 8C05 (H), so that the commands 8C01 (H) to 8C05 (H) are specified as the display results. It is called a command.

  Command 8D01 (H) is an effect control command (first symbol variation designation command) indicating that variable display (variation) of the first special symbol is started. Command 8D02 (H) is an effect control command (second symbol variation designation command) indicating that variable display (variation) of the second special symbol is started. The first symbol variation designation command and the second symbol variation designation command may be collectively referred to as a special symbol specifying command (or symbol variation designation command). Note that information indicating whether to start variable display of the first special symbol or variable display of the second special symbol may be included in the variation pattern command.

  Command 8F00 (H) is an effect control command (symbol confirmation designation command) indicating that the variable display (fluctuation) of effect symbols (and decoration symbols) is terminated and the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. When receiving the symbol confirmation designation command, the effect control microcomputer 100 ends the variable display (fluctuation) of the effect symbol and the decorative symbol and derives and displays the display result.

  Command 9000 (H) is an effect control command (initialization designation command: power-on designation command) transmitted when power supply to the gaming machine is started. Command 9200 (H) is an effect control command (power failure recovery designation command) transmitted when power supply to the gaming machine is resumed. When the power supply to the gaming machine is started, the gaming control microcomputer 560 transmits a power failure recovery designation command if data is stored in the backup RAM, and if not, initialization designation is performed. Send a command.

  Command 9F00 (H) is an effect control command (customer waiting demonstration designation command) for designating a customer waiting demonstration.

  The commands A001 to A003 (H) are for displaying a fanfare screen, that is, an effect control command for designating the start of a jackpot game or the start of a jackpot game (a jackpot start designation command or a jackpot start designation command: a fanfare designation command). is there. The big hit start designation command or the small hit start designation command includes a big hit start 1 designation command, a big hit start designation 2 designation command, and a small hit / rush start designation command corresponding to the type or small hit. The command A1XX (H) is an effect control command (special command during opening of a big winning opening) indicating a display during the opening of the big winning opening for the number of times (round) indicated by XX. A2XX (H) is an effect control command (designation command after opening the big winning opening) indicating the closing of the big winning opening for the number of times (round) indicated by XX.

  Command A301 (H) displays a jackpot end screen, that is, specifies the end of the jackpot game and an effect control command (special jackpot end 1 designation command: ending) that specifies that the jackpot game is a non-probable big hit (usually a big hit) 1 designation command). Command A302 (H) is an effect control command for displaying the jackpot end screen, that is, the end of the jackpot game and specifying that it is a probable big hit (big hit end 2 designation command: ending 2 designation command). is there. Command A303 (H) is an effect control command (small hit / probability end designation command: ending 3 designation command) for designating the end of the small hit game or the sudden probability change game.

  Command B000 (H) is an effect control command (first probability variation state designation command) that designates that the gaming state has transitioned to the probability variation state after the end of the 15-round jackpot game that has shifted based on the probability variation jackpot. is there. Command B001 (H) is an effect control command (second probability variation state designation command) for designating that the gaming state has transitioned to the probability variation state after the end of the two-round jackpot game that has transitioned based on the sudden probability variation jackpot. It is. Command B100 (H) is an effect control command (probability change end designation command) for designating that the probability change state has ended.

  The command C000 (H) is an effect control command (first start winning designation command) that designates that the first start winning has been won. The command C100 (H) is an effect control command (second start winning designation command) for designating that the second starting win has been won. The first start prize designation command and the second start prize designation command may be collectively referred to as a start prize designation command.

  The command C2XX (H) is an effect control command (total pending storage number designation command) that designates the total number (total pending storage number) that is the sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number. “XX” in the command C2XX (H) indicates the total pending storage number. The command C300 (H) is an effect control command (total pending storage count subtraction designation command) that designates that the total pending storage count is decremented by one. In this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits a total pending memory count subtraction designation command when subtracting the total pending memory count, but does not use the total pending memory count subtraction designation command, and does not use the total pending memory count subtraction designation command. When the stored number is subtracted, the combined pending storage number after the subtraction may be designated by a combined pending storage number designation command.

  The effect control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the effect control CPU 101) mounted on the effect control board 80 receives the above-described effect control command from the game control microcomputer 560 mounted on the main board 31. Then, the display state of the image display device 9 is changed according to the contents shown in FIG. 24, the display state of the lamp is changed, and the sound number data is output to the audio output board 70.

  For example, the game control microcomputer 560 designates the variation pattern of the effect symbol whenever there is a start prize and variable display of the special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b. The variation pattern command and the display result specifying command are transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100.

  In this embodiment, the presentation control command has a 2-byte structure, the first byte represents MODE (command classification), and the second byte represents EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always set to “1”, and the first bit (bit 7) of the EXT data is always set to “0”. Note that such a command form is an example, and other command forms may be used. For example, a control command composed of 1 byte or 3 bytes or more may be used.

  In addition, as the transmission method of the effect control command, the effect control command data is output from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80 via the relay board 77 by the eight parallel signal lines of the effect control signals CD0 to CD7, In addition to the effect control command data, a method of outputting a pulse-shaped (rectangular wave-shaped) capture signal (effect control INT signal) for instructing capture of the effect control command data is used. The 8-bit effect control command data of the effect control command is output in synchronization with the effect control INT signal. The effect control microcomputer 100 mounted on the effect control board 80 detects that the effect control INT signal has risen, and starts a 1-byte data capturing process through an interrupt process.

  In the example shown in FIG. 24, the variable pattern command and the display result specifying command are displayed in a variable display (variation) of the decorative symbol corresponding to the variation of the first special symbol on the first special symbol indicator 8a and the second special symbol indicator. The image display device 9 that can be used in common with the variable display (variation) of the decorative symbol corresponding to the variation of the second special symbol in 8b, and that produces effects in accordance with the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. When controlling the effect parts, it is possible to prevent an increase in the types of commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 to the effect control microcomputer 100.

  Note that the command 8D01 (H) (first symbol variation designation command) and the command 8D02 (H) (second symbol variation designation command) are executed by the effect control microcomputer 100 by the first special symbol display 8a. Whether or not the first decorative symbol display 9a that performs variable display of the first decorative symbol as a decorative (directing) symbol during the variable display time of the symbol is subjected to the variation of the decorative symbol, by the second special symbol display 8b. It is used to determine whether or not the decorative symbol is changed in the second decorative symbol display unit 9b that performs variable display of the second decorative symbol during the variable display time of the second special symbol.

  FIG. 25 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a special symbol process (step S26) program executed by the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) mounted on the main board 31. As described above, in the special symbol process, a process for controlling the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b and the special winning opening is executed. In the special symbol process, the CPU 56 detects that the game ball has won the first start port switch 13a or the second start port 14 for detecting that the game ball has won the first start game port 13. If the second start port switch 14a is turned on, that is, if a start winning is generated, start port switch passing processing is executed (steps S311 and S312). Then, any one of steps S300 to S310 is performed. If the first start winning port switch 13a or the second start port switch 14a is not turned on, any one of steps S300 to S310 is performed according to the internal state.

  The processes in steps S300 to S310 are as follows.

  Special symbol normal processing (step S300): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is zero. When the game control microcomputer 560 is in a state where variable display of a special symbol can be started, the game control microcomputer 560 checks the number of numerical data stored in the reserved storage number buffer (total reserved storage number). The number of numerical data stored in the reserved storage number buffer can be confirmed by the count value of the total reserved storage number counter. If the count value of the total reserved memory number counter is not 0, it is determined whether the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a big hit or a small hit. In case of big hit, set big hit flag. In the case of a small hit, a small hit flag is set. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (1 in this example) according to step S301. The big hit flag and the small hit flag are reset when the big hit game or the small hit game ends.

  Fluctuation pattern setting process (step S301): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 1. Also, the variation pattern is determined, and the variation time in the variation pattern (variable display time: the time from the start of variable display until the display result is derived and displayed (stop display)) is defined as the variation display variation time of the special symbol. Decide to do. Also, a variable time timer for measuring the special symbol variable time is started. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (2 in this example) corresponding to step S302.

  Display result specifying command transmission process (step S302): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 2. Control for transmitting a display result specifying command to the production control microcomputer 100 is performed. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (3 in this example) corresponding to step S303.

  Special symbol changing process (step S303): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 3. When the variation time of the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern setting process elapses (the variation time timer set in step S301 times out, that is, the variation time timer value becomes 0), the internal state (special symbol process flag) is stepped. Update to a value corresponding to S304 (4 in this example).

  Special symbol stop process (step S304): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 4. The variable display on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b is stopped, and the stop symbol is derived and displayed. In addition, control for transmitting a symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 is performed. When the big hit flag or the small hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (5 or 8 in this example) corresponding to step S305 or step S308. If neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S300 (in this example, 0). The effect control microcomputer 100 controls the effect display device 9 to stop the effect symbol and the decorative symbol when receiving the symbol confirmation designation command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560.

  Preliminary winning opening opening process (step S305): This is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 5. In the pre-opening process for the big prize opening, control for opening the big prize opening is performed. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the big prize opening) is initialized and the solenoid 21 is driven to open the big prize opening. Also, the execution time of the special prize opening opening process is set by the timer, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S306 (6 in this example). The pre-opening process for the big winning opening is executed for each round, but when the first round is started, the pre-opening process for the big winning opening is also a process for starting the big hit game.

  Large winning opening opening process (step S306): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 6. A control for transmitting an effect control command for round display during the big hit game state or the small hit game to the effect control microcomputer 100, a process for confirming that the closing condition of the big prize opening is established, and the like are performed. If the closing condition for the special prize opening is satisfied and there are still remaining rounds, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (5 in this example) corresponding to step S305. When all the rounds are completed, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S307 (7 in this example).

  Big hit end process (step S307): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 7. Control is performed to cause the microcomputer 100 for effect control to perform display control for notifying the player that the big hit gaming state has ended. In addition, a process for setting a flag indicating a gaming state (for example, a probability change flag or a time reduction flag) is performed. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to step S300.

  Small hit release pre-processing (step S308): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 8. In the pre-opening process for small hits, control is performed to open the big prize opening. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the big prize opening) is initialized and the solenoid 21 is driven to open the big prize opening. Also, the execution time of the special winning opening opening process is set by the timer, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S309 (9 in this example). It should be noted that although the pre-opening process for small hits is executed for each round, the pre-opening process for small hits is also a process for starting a small hit game when starting the first round.

  Small hit release processing (step S309): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 9. A control for transmitting an effect control command for a round display during the small hit gaming state to the effect control microcomputer 100, a process for confirming the completion of the closing condition of the big prize opening, and the like are performed. If the closing condition for the big prize opening is satisfied and there are still remaining rounds, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S308 (8 in this example). When all rounds are completed, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S310 (in this example, 10 (decimal number)).

  Small hit end process (step S310): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 10. Control is performed to cause the microcomputer 100 for effect control to perform display control for notifying the player that the small hit gaming state has ended. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to step S300.

  FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the start-port switch passing process in step S312. In the start port switch passing process executed when at least one of the first start port switch 13a and the second start port switch 14a is in the on state, the CPU 56 is turned on by the first start port switch 13a. Whether or not (step S211). If the first start port switch 13a is on, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the first reserved memory number counter for counting the first reserved memory number is 4 (step S212). If the value of the first reserved memory number counter is 4, the process proceeds to step S221.

  If the value of the first reserved memory number counter is not 4, the CPU 56 increments the value of the first reserved memory number counter by 1 (step S213). Further, the CPU 56 corresponds to the value of the total reserved storage number counter in the reserved storage specific information storage area (hold specific area) for storing the winning order to the first start winning opening 13 and the second start winning opening 14. Data indicating “first” is set in the area (step S214).

  In this embodiment, when the first start opening switch 13a is turned on (that is, when a game ball starts and wins the first start winning opening 13), data indicating “first” is set, When the second start port switch 14a is turned on (that is, when a game ball starts and wins the second start winning port 14), data indicating “second” is set. For example, the CPU 56 sets 01 (H) as data indicating “first” when the first start port switch 13 a is turned on in the reserved storage specifying information storage area (holding specified area), and the first 2 When the start port switch 14a is turned on, 02 (H) is set as data indicating “second”. In this case, when there is no corresponding reserved storage, 00 (H) is set in the reserved storage specific information storage area (hold specific area).

  FIG. 27A is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of a reserved storage specifying information storage area (holding specified area). As shown in FIG. 27A, an area corresponding to the maximum value (8 in this example) of the total reserved memory number counter is secured in the reserved specific area. FIG. 27A shows an example in which the value of the total pending storage number counter is 5. As shown in FIG. 27A, an area corresponding to the maximum value (8 in this example) of the total reserved memory number counter is secured in the reserved specific area, and the first start winning opening 13 or the second start is determined. Data indicating “first” or “second” is set in order of winning based on winning in the winning opening 14. Accordingly, in the reserved storage specific information storage area (hold specific area), the winning order to the first start winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14 is stored. Note that the reserved specific area is formed in the RAM 55. “Formed in RAM” means an area in the RAM.

  FIG. 27B is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of an area (hold buffer) for storing random numbers and the like corresponding to the hold memory. As shown in FIG. 27B, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value (4 in this example) of the first reserved storage number is secured in the first reserved storage buffer. In addition, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value of the second reserved storage number (4 in this example) is secured in the second reserved storage buffer. The first reserved storage buffer and the second reserved storage buffer are formed in the RAM 55.

  In the start port switch passing process, the CPU 56 extracts a value from the random number circuit 503 and a counter for generating a software random number, and executes a process of storing them in the storage area in the first reserved storage buffer (step S215). . In the process of step S215, random R (big hit determination random number) and software random number 2-1 (see FIG. 10) are stored in the storage area.

  Next, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a first start winning designation command (step S216). Further, the CPU 56 increases the value of the total pending memory number counter indicating the total pending memory number that is the sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number by 1 (step S217). Then, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a total pending storage number designation command indicating the total pending storage number based on the value of the total pending storage number counter (step S218). Note that the total pending storage number designation command may be transmitted before the first start winning designation command.

  When transmitting an effect control command to the effect control microcomputer 100, the CPU 56 sets an address of a command transmission table (preliminarily set for each command in the ROM) corresponding to the effect control command as a pointer. . And the address of the command transmission table according to an effect control command is set to a pointer, and an effect control command is transmitted in an effect control command control process (step S29).

  Next, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the second start port switch 14a is turned on (step S221). If the second start port switch 14a is on, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the second reserved memory number counter for counting the second reserved memory number is 4 (step S222). If the value of the second reserved memory number counter is 4, the process is terminated. If the value of the second reserved memory number counter is 4, the CPU 56 may perform the process of confirming again whether the first start port switch 13a is on (see step S211).

  If the value of the second reserved memory number counter is not 4, the CPU 56 increases the value of the second reserved memory number counter by 1 (step S223). Further, the CPU 56 sets data indicating “second” in an area corresponding to the value of the total reserved storage number counter in the reserved storage specific information storage area (hold specific area) (step S224).

  Next, the CPU 56 extracts values from the random number circuit 503 and a counter for generating software random numbers, and executes a process of storing them in a storage area in the second reserved storage buffer (step S225). Note that, in the process of step S225, random R (a big hit determination random number) and random 2-1 (see FIG. 10) are stored in the storage area.

  Next, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a second start winning designation command (step S226). Further, the CPU 56 increases the value of the total pending storage number counter by 1 (step S227). Then, the CPU 56 transmits a total pending storage number designation command based on the value of the total pending storage number counter (step S228). Note that the total pending storage number designation command may be transmitted before the second start winning designation command.

  In addition, you may implement | achieve the process of step S213-218 and the process of step S223-228 by one common routine. In that case, the CPU 56 first sets data indicating “first” when detecting that the first start port switch 13a is turned on, and indicates that the second start port switch 14a is turned on. When data is detected, the data indicating “second” is set, and the common storage routine selects the reserved memory number buffer (first reserved memory number buffer or second reserved memory number buffer) according to the set data. Or a start prize designation command (first start prize designation command or second start prize designation command) is selected.

  28 and 29 are flowcharts showing the special symbol normal process (step S300) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol normal process, the CPU 56 confirms the value of the total pending storage number (step S51). Specifically, the count value of the total pending storage number counter is confirmed. If the total pending storage number is 0, the process is terminated.

  If the total pending storage number is not 0, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the first data among the data set in the pending specific area (see FIG. 27A) is data indicating “first”. (Step S52). If it is data indicating “first”, a special symbol pointer (a flag indicating whether special symbol process processing is being performed for the first special symbol or special symbol process processing is being performed for the second special symbol) is set to “first 1 "is set (step S53). If it is not data indicating “first”, that is, if it is data indicating “second”, data indicating “second” is set in the special symbol pointer (step S54).

  In the RAM 55, the CPU 56 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number = 1 indicated by the special symbol pointer, and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55 (step S55). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 determines each disturbance stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = 1 in the first reserved memory number buffer. The numerical value is read and stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55. In addition, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the CPU 56 reads each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = 1 in the second reserved memory number buffer. And stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55.

  Then, the CPU 56 decrements the count value of the reserved storage number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step S56). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 decrements the count value of the first reserved memory number counter by 1 and saves each storage area in the first reserved memory number buffer. Shift the contents of. When the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the count value of the second reserved memory number counter is decremented by 1, and the contents of each storage area in the second reserved memory number buffer are shifted.

  That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 saves the first reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first reserved memory number buffer of the RAM 55. Are stored in a storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = n−1. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, it is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved memory number buffer of the RAM 55. Each random number value is stored in a storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = n−1.

  Therefore, the order in which each random value stored in each storage area corresponding to each first reserved memory number (or each second reserved memory number) is extracted is always the first reserved memory number (or (Second reserved storage number) = 1, 2, 3, 4 in order.

  Then, the CPU 56 stores the count value of the total pending storage number counter in a predetermined area of the RAM 55 (step S57), and then decreases the value of the total pending storage number by one. That is, 1 is subtracted from the count value of the total pending storage number counter (step S58). The CPU 56 stores the value of the total pending storage number counter before the count value is decremented by 1 in a predetermined area of the RAM 55.

  In the special symbol normal process, first, data indicating “first” indicating that the process is executed for the first start winning opening 13, that is, “first” indicating that the process is executed for the first special symbol. ”Or“ second ”indicating that the process is performed on the second special symbol, that is,“ second ”indicating that the process is performed on the second start winning opening 14. Data is set in the special symbol pointer. In the subsequent processing in the special symbol process, processing corresponding to the data set in the special symbol pointer is executed. Therefore, the process of steps S300 to S310 can be made common between the case of targeting the first special symbol and the case of targeting the second special symbol.

  Next, the CPU 56 reads a random R (a jackpot determination random number) from the random number buffer area (step S61), and executes a jackpot determination module (step S62). The jackpot determination module is a program that compares a jackpot determination value (see FIG. 11) determined in advance with a jackpot determination random number, and executes a process of determining a jackpot or a small hit if they match. In other words, this is a program for executing the big hit determination process.

  The jackpot determination process is configured such that when the gaming state is a probable change state (high probability state), the probability of a big hit is higher than when the gaming state is a non-probability change state (normal game state and short-time state). ing. Specifically, the probability change jackpot determination table (a table in which the numerical value on the right side of FIG. 11A in the ROM 54 is set) in which a large number of jackpot determination values are set in advance, and the number of jackpot determination values are variable. There is provided a normal big hit determination table (a table in which the numerical values on the left side of FIG. 11A in the ROM 54 are set) set to be smaller than the big hit determination table. Then, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the gaming state is a probability variation state. If the gaming state is a probability variation state, the jackpot determination process is performed using the probability variation jackpot determination table, and the gaming state is normal. When in the gaming state, the big hit determination process is performed using the normal big hit determination table. That is, when the value of the big hit determination random number (random R) matches any of the big hit determination values shown in FIG. 11A, the CPU 56 determines that the special symbol is a big hit (probability big hit or normal big hit). . When it is determined to be a big hit (step S61), the process proceeds to step S71. Note that deciding whether to win or not is to decide whether or not to shift to the big hit gaming state, but to decide whether or not to stop the special symbol display as a big hit symbol. There is also.

  Note that whether or not the current gaming state is the probability variation state is determined by whether or not the probability variation flag is set. The probability variation flag is set when the gaming state is shifted to the probability variation state, and is reset when the probability variation state is terminated. Specifically, it is determined to be a probable big hit or suddenly probable big hit, set in the process of ending the big hit game, determined to be a normal big hit, and reset in the process of ending the big hit game.

  If the random R value does not match any of the big hit determination values, it is checked whether the random R value matches any of the small hit determination values (step S62). If they match, a small hit flag is set (step S63). Then, the process proceeds to step S75. If it does not coincide with the small hit determination value, the process proceeds to step S75.

  In step S71, the CPU 56 sets a big hit flag. Then, the jackpot type determination table 131 shown in FIG. 11C is selected as a table used to determine the jackpot type as one of a plurality of types (step S72). The type corresponding to the value of the jackpot type determination random number (random 2-1) stored in the random number buffer area (“normal”, “probability” or “surprise”) is determined as the jackpot type ( Step S73). Further, the data indicating the determined jackpot type is set in the jackpot type buffer in the RAM 55 (step S74). For example, when the jackpot type is “normal”, “01” is set as the data indicating the jackpot type, and when the jackpot type is “probability”, “02” is set as the data indicating the jackpot type. Is “03”, “03” is set as data indicating the big hit type.

  Next, the CPU 56 determines a special symbol stop symbol (step S75). Specifically, when the big hit flag and the small hit flag are not set, “−” as a special symbol is determined as the special symbol stop symbol. When the small hit flag is set, “5” as the small hit symbol is determined as a special symbol stop symbol. When the big hit flag is set, one of “1”, “3”, and “7”, which is a big hit symbol, is determined as a special symbol stop symbol according to the determination result of the big hit type. That is, when the big hit type is determined to be “surprise”, “1”, which is the two round big hit symbol, is determined as a special symbol stop symbol. When the big hit type is determined as “normal” or “probability change”, “3” or “7” is determined as a special symbol stop symbol.

  Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S301) (step S76).

  FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern setting process (step S301) in the special symbol process. In the variation pattern setting process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S91).

  When the jackpot flag is set, the table used to determine the variation pattern type as one of a plurality of types is used in accordance with the table selection rule shown in FIG. One of the use variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132G is selected (step S92). Then, the process proceeds to step S101. The CPU 56 can determine the gaming state based on the state of the probability change flag and the time reduction flag.

  When the small hit flag is set, a small hit variation pattern is used as a table used to determine the variation pattern type as one of a plurality of types according to the table selection rule shown in FIG. One of the type determination tables 133A to 133C is selected (steps S93 and S94). Then, the process proceeds to step S101.

  When neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, the table selection rule shown in FIG. 15D is based on whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal state, the probability variation state, or the short-time state. Accordingly, one of the reach determination tables 134A to 134C is selected as a table used for determining whether or not the variable display state of the effect symbols is set to the reach state (step S95). Further, random 2-2 is extracted by extracting the count value of the counter for generating random 2-2 (step S96). Then, the CPU 56 is in the reach state corresponding to the value that matches the value of random 2-2 in the area corresponding to the reserved storage number (the value of the reserved storage number counter) in any of the selected reach determination tables 134A to 134C. Based on the data indicating presence / absence, whether or not to reach, the type of effect when not reaching or the type of reach when reaching is determined (step S97). Note that the value before being decremented by -1 in the process of step S53 may be used as the reserved storage number used in the process of step S97.

  If it is determined to reach, the variation pattern type is determined according to the reach type (reach HA2-1 to reach HA2-3, reach HB2-1, or reach HC2-1) determined in the process of step S97. One of the reach variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C is selected as a table used for determining one of a plurality of types (step S99). If it is decided not to reach, the types of effects determined in step S97 (non-reach HA1-1 to non-reach HA1-5, non-reach HB1-1, non-reach HB1-2, non-reach HC1- 1 or non-reach HC1-2), one of non-reach variation pattern type determination tables 136A to 136C is selected as a table used to determine one of a plurality of variation pattern types. (Step S100). Then, the process proceeds to step S101.

  In step S101, the CPU 56 extracts the value of random 3 by extracting the count value of the counter for generating random 3. Then, based on the extracted random 3 value, the variation pattern type is determined as one of a plurality of types by referring to the table selected in the process of step S92, S94, S99 or S100 (step S102). .

  Next, the CPU 56 uses the hit variation pattern determination tables 137A to 137C as the tables used to determine the variation pattern as one of a plurality of types based on the determination result of the variation pattern type in step S102. One of the determination tables 138A and 138B is selected (step S103). Further, the value of random 4 is extracted by extracting the count value of the counter for generating random 4 (step S104). Then, based on the extracted random 4 value, the variation pattern is determined as one of a plurality of types by referring to the variation pattern determination table selected in step S103 (step S105).

  As a variation pattern, a variation pattern including super-rendition production other than non-reach PA1-5 (super PA3-3, super PA3-6, super PB3-3, super PA4-3, super PA4-6, super PA5-3, If the super PB 4-3, the super PB 5-3, or the special PG 1-3) is determined (step S106A), the CPU 56 extracts the count value of the random 7 by extracting the count value of the counter for generating the random 7 Extract the value. Then, based on the extracted random 7 value, by referring to the pseudo-continuous effect pattern determination table 140 shown in FIGS. 22 and 23, the variation pattern including the pseudo-continuous effect is determined as one of a plurality of types. (Step S106B). That is, the number of re-variation executions (including the first pseudo variation) in the pseudo-continuous performance is determined. In addition, by the processing in step S106B, the variation time for executing the pseudo continuous effect is also determined.

  Next, an effect control command (variation pattern command) corresponding to the determined variation pattern is controlled to be transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S106).

  Also, the special symbol change is started (step S107). For example, a start flag corresponding to the special symbol referred to in the special symbol display control process in step S33 is set. Further, a value corresponding to the variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the variation time timer formed in the RAM 55 (step S108). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the display result specifying command transmission process (step S302) (step S109).

  FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the display result specifying command transmission process (step S302). In the display result specifying command transmission process, the CPU 56 transmits an effect control command (see FIG. 24) of any one of the display result 1 designation to the display result 5 designation according to the determined type of big hit, small hit, and loss. Control. Specifically, the CPU 56 first checks whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S110). If not set, the process proceeds to step S116. When the big hit flag is set, when the big hit type is a probable big hit, control is performed to transmit a display result 3 designation command (steps S111 and S112). When the type of jackpot is a sudden probability change jackpot, control is performed to transmit a display result 4 designation command (steps S113 and S114). If neither the probability variation big hit nor sudden probability variation big hit is found, control is performed to transmit a display result 2 designation command (step S115).

  When the CPU 56 confirms that the small hit flag is set in the process of step S116, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a display result 5 designation command (step S117). When the small hit flag is not set, control for transmitting a display result 1 designation command is performed (step S118).

  Then, a total pending storage number subtraction designation command designating that 1 is subtracted from the total pending storage number is transmitted (step S119). Instead of transmitting the total pending storage number subtraction designation command, a total pending storage number designation command for designating the total pending storage number after subtraction may be transmitted. Further, the CPU 56 stores the transmitted display result specifying command in the effect symbol type storage area in the RAM 55.

  Thereafter, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol changing process (step S303) (step S120).

  FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the special symbol changing process (step S303) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol changing process, the CPU 56 decrements the variable time timer by 1 (step S125), and when the variable time timer times out (step S126), the value of the special symbol process flag corresponds to the special symbol stop process (step S304). The updated value is updated (step S127). If the variable time timer has not timed out, the process ends.

  FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the special symbol stop process (step S304) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol stop process, the CPU 56 sets the end flag referred to in the special symbol display control process in step S32 to end the variation of the special symbol, and the first special symbol display unit 8a or the second special symbol display unit 8b. Then, a control for deriving and displaying the stop symbol is performed (step S131). If data indicating “first” is set in the special symbol pointer, the variation of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a is terminated, and “second” is indicated in the special symbol pointer. When data is set, the variation of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b is terminated. Moreover, control which transmits the symbol determination designation | designated command to the microcomputer 100 for production control is performed (step S132). If the big hit flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S139 (step S133).

  When the big hit flag is set, the CPU 56 resets the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag (step S134), and performs control to send a big hit start designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S135). Specifically, when the type of jackpot is a probabilistic jackpot, a jackpot start 2 designation command is transmitted. When the big hit type is suddenly a probable big hit, a small hit / surprise start designation command is transmitted. Otherwise, a jackpot start 1 designation command is transmitted. Whether or not the big hit type is a probable big hit or a sudden probable big hit is determined based on data indicating the big hit type stored in the RAM 55 (data stored in the big hit type buffer). In this embodiment, the case where the common small hit / rush start command is used for the small hit and sudden sudden change big hit is shown. However, the small hit and sudden sudden change big hit are separately used. The start designation command may be used. In this case, in step S135, it may be controlled to transmit a small hit start designation command if it is a small hit, and may be controlled to transmit a sudden start designation command if it is suddenly probable big hit.

  Further, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a probability variation end designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 based on resetting the probability variation flag and ending the probability variation state (step S135A).

  Also, a value corresponding to the big hit display time (for example, the time for notifying that the big hit has occurred in the effect display device 9) is set in the big hit display time timer (step S136). In addition, the number of times of opening (for example, 15 times in the case of a normal big hit and a probable big hit (15 round big hit) and 2 times in the case of a sudden hit (2 round big hit)) is set in the big prize opening number counter (step). S137). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the pre-winner opening pre-processing (step S305) (step S138).

  In step S139, the CPU 56 checks whether or not a time reduction flag indicating that the time reduction state is set. If the time reduction flag is set, the value of the time reduction counter indicating the number of times the special symbol can be changed in the time reduction state is decremented by 1 (step S140). Then, when the value of the time reduction counter becomes 0, the time reduction flag is reset (step S142). And it is confirmed whether the small hit flag is set (step S143). When the small hit flag is set, control is performed to transmit a small hit / probability start designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S144). In addition, a value corresponding to the small hit display time (for example, the time when the effect display device 9 notifies that the small hit has occurred) is set in the small hit display time timer (step S145). Further, the number of times of opening (2 times) is set in the special winning opening opening number counter (step S146). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small hit release pre-processing (step S308) (step S147). If the small hit flag is not set, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S300) (step S148).

  FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the pre-opening process for the special winning opening in the special symbol process (step S305). In the big prize opening pre-processing, the CPU 56 decrements the value of the big prize opening control timer by 1 (step S401). Then, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the big prize opening control timer is 0 (step S402). If the value of the big prize opening control timer is not 0, the process is terminated.

  When the value of the big prize opening control timer is 0, the CPU 56 designates the big prize opening opening designation command (A1XX) for designating the display state according to the number of rounds during the opening of the big prize opening (during round). (H)) is transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100 (step S403). Note that the CPU 56 recognizes the number of rounds by checking the value of the number-of-releases counter for counting the number of rounds in the big hit game. Then, the CPU 56 drives the solenoid 21 to perform control for opening the special winning opening (special variable winning ball apparatus 20) (step S404), and decrements the value of the opening number counter by -1 (step S405).

  Further, a value corresponding to the maximum time that the big prize opening can be opened in each round is set in the big prize opening control timer (step S406). For example, in the case of 15 round big hits, the maximum time is 29 seconds, and in the case of sudden probability big hit or small hit, the maximum time is 0.5 seconds. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the step large winning opening opening process (step S306) (step S415).

  FIG. 35 and FIG. 36 are flowcharts showing the special prize opening process during the special symbol process (step S306). In the special prize opening opening process, the CPU 56 decrements the value of the special prize opening control timer by -1 (step S420).

  Then, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the value of the special winning opening control timer has become 0 (step S421). When the value of the big prize opening control timer is not 0, it is confirmed whether or not the count switch 23 is turned on (step S432). If the count switch 23 is not turned on, the process is terminated. When the count switch 23 is turned on, the value of the winning number counter for counting the number of winning game balls to the big winning opening is incremented by 1 (step S433). Then, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the winning number counter is a predetermined number (for example, 10) (step S434). If the value of the winning number counter is not a predetermined number, the process is terminated. Note that the determination order of S421 and S432 may be reversed.

  When the value of the big prize opening control timer is 0, or when the value of the winning number counter is a predetermined number, the CPU 56 performs control to drive the solenoid 21 and close the big prize opening (step). S435). Then, the value of the winning number counter is cleared (set to 0) (step S436).

  Next, the CPU 56 confirms the value of the opening number counter (step S438). When the value of the number-of-opening counter is not 0, the CPU 56 designates the post-big prize opening after-opening designation command (A2XX (H)) for designating the display state according to the number of rounds after the big prize opening is opened (after the round is completed) ) Is transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100 (step S439). Then, a value corresponding to the time (interval period) from the end of the round to the start of the next round (interval period) is set in the big prize opening control timer (step S440), and the value of the special symbol process flag is set to the big prize opening. The value is updated according to the pre-opening process (step S305) (step S441). The interval period is, for example, 5 seconds. In the case of sudden probability big hit or small hit, it may be shorter than 15R big hit.

  When the value of the number-of-opens counter is 0, the CPU 56 sets a value corresponding to the big hit end time (for example, a time for notifying that the big hit game has ended in the effect display device 9) in the big prize opening control timer. (Step S442), and the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot end process (Step S307) (Step S443).

  FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the jackpot end process (step S307) in the special symbol process. In the jackpot end process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the jackpot end display timer is set (step S150). If the jackpot end display timer is set, the process proceeds to step S154. If the jackpot end display timer is not set, the jackpot flag is reset (step S151), and control for transmitting a jackpot end designation command is performed (step S152). Here, if it is a probable big hit, a big hit end 2 designation command is sent, if it is suddenly a probable big hit, a small hit / collision end designation command is sent. Send a command. Then, a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time during which the big hit end display is being performed in the image display device 9 (the big hit end display time) is set in the big hit end display timer (step S153), and the processing is ended. Note that the process of step S152 may be executed before step S442 in the special winning opening opening process.

  In step S154, 1 is subtracted from the value of the big hit end display timer. Then, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step S155). If not, the process ends. If it has elapsed, it is confirmed whether or not the type of jackpot is a probable jackpot (step S158A). Specifically, whether or not the type of jackpot is a probable variation jackpot, specifically, whether or not the data set in the jackpot type buffer in step S74 of the special symbol normal process is data “02” indicating “probability variation”. It can be determined by checking. If the big hit type is a probable big hit (Y in step S158A), the game state is shifted to the probable state after the end of 15 rounds of the big hit game. Control to transmit the designated command is performed (step S158B). Then, the probability variation flag is set to shift the gaming state to the probability variation state (step S161), and the processing proceeds to step S162.

  If the big hit type is not a probable variation big hit (N in Step S158A), the CPU 56 checks whether or not the big hit type is a sudden probable big hit (Step S158C). Whether or not the type of jackpot is a sudden probability change jackpot, specifically, whether or not the data set in the jackpot type buffer in step S74 of the special symbol normal processing is data “03” indicating “surprise”. It can be determined by confirming. If the type of jackpot is a sudden probability change jackpot (Y in step S158C), the game state is shifted to the probability change state after the end of the two rounds of jackpot game. Control to transmit the state designation command is performed (step S158D). Then, the probability variation flag is set to shift the gaming state to the probability variation state (step S161), and the processing proceeds to step S162.

  If the type of jackpot is not suddenly a probability change jackpot (N in step S158C), that is, if it is a normal jackpot, the CPU 56 does not set the probability change flag (that is, shifts the gaming state to the probability change state). Without), the process proceeds to step S162.

  Next, the CPU 56 sets a time reduction flag (step S162), and sets, for example, 100 to a time reduction number counter (step S163). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S300) (step S164).

  Although the timers and flags to be handled are different, the small hit pre-release process in step S308 is the same as the big hit open pre-process in step S305, and the small hit open process in step S309 is during the big prize opening open in step S306. This is the same processing as the processing, and the small hitting end pre-processing in step S310 is similar to the big hitting end processing in step S307.

  Next, specific examples of effects executed during variable display will be described with reference to the explanatory diagrams of FIGS. 38 to 41, the display screen of the effect display device 9 is shown by a rectangle. That is, in FIGS. 38 to 41, a part of the display screen of the circular effect display device 9 shown in FIG. Further, the characters as the production information attached to the production symbols are also omitted. FIG. 38 shows an effect produced by the control of the effect control microcomputer 100 when the variable effect of the effect symbol is “non-reach”, when the specific effect is not executed, and when the “pseudo-continuous” specific effect is executed. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a display operation example in the display device 9. FIG. When the variation pattern of the non-reach PA1-1 is designated by the variation pattern designation command, the specific effect is not executed as shown in FIGS. 38 (C1) and (C2). When the variation pattern of non-reach PA1-4 is designated, a specific effect of “slip” as shown in FIGS. 38 (E1) to (E4) is executed. When the variation pattern of non-reach PA 1-5 is designated, the “pseudo-continuous” specific effects as shown in FIGS. 38 (D1) to (D6) are executed. 38 (D1) to 38 (D6) show simplified pseudo-continuous effects.

  In the example shown in FIG. 38A, for example, in response to the start of variation of the special symbol in the variable symbol special display, the symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R of “left”, “middle”, and “right” are displayed. In all, the change of the production design is started. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 38B, the effect symbol “6” is stopped (temporarily stopped) in the “left” symbol display area 9L.

  When the specific effect is not executed or when the “slip” specific effect is executed, corresponding to the determination that the effect symbol “6” is determined as the left final stop symbol FZ1-1, FIG. A stop display of the effect symbol as shown in FIG. If the variation display mode of the effect symbol is “non-reach” and the variation pattern of the non-reach PA1-4 in which the specific effect of “slip” is executed, the specific effect pattern is always determined to be the slip TP1-1. Then (see FIG. 53), the “slip” specific effect is executed in the “right” symbol display area 9R to cause the effect symbol to be re-varied at high speed. Therefore, the effect symbol stopped and displayed in the “left” symbol display area 9L is not changed depending on the specific effect of “slip”. When a specific effect of “pseudo ream” is executed, when an effect symbol of “6” is determined as the left final stop symbol FZ1-1, an effect symbol stop display as shown in FIG. Done.

  After that, when the specific effect is not executed, for example, as shown in FIG. 38 (C1), the effect symbol “7” is stopped and displayed (temporary stop display) in the “right” symbol display area 9R. As shown in 38 (C2), after the effect symbol “4” is stopped and displayed in the “medium” symbol display area 9C (temporary stop display), the effect symbol that is a non-reach combination is stopped and displayed (final stop display). Is done. At this time, the effect symbols that are stopped and displayed in the “right” symbol display area 9R and the “middle” symbol display area 9C are determined as the right final stop symbol FZ1-2 and the middle final stop symbol FZ1-3.

  When the “pseudo-continuous” specific effect is executed, for example, as shown in FIG. 38 (D1), the “7” effect symbol is stopped (temporarily stopped) in the “right” symbol display area 9R. Then, as shown in FIG. 38 (D2), by stopping the display of the “6” effect symbol in the “medium” symbol display area 9C (temporary stop display), the effect symbol that becomes the pseudo-continuous chance GC6 is stopped. Is displayed. At this time, for example, a temporary stop display such as a fluctuation change display of the effect symbols is performed, and then the effect symbols are changed again in all the symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R as shown in FIG. 38 (D3). Thereafter, for example, as shown in FIGS. 38 (D4) to (D6), the effect symbols “6”, “7”, and “4” are sequentially applied in a predetermined order of “left” → “right” → “middle”. After the stop display (temporary stop display), the effect symbol that is a non-reach combination is stopped (final stop display).

  When the “slip” specific effect is executed, for example, as shown in FIG. 38 (E1), the “5” effect symbol is stopped (temporarily stopped) in the “right” symbol display area 9R. Thus, as shown in FIG. 38 (E2), the effect symbol is re-varied at high speed in the “right” symbol display area 9R. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 38 (E3), the effect symbol to be stopped and displayed is changed so that the effect symbol “7” is displayed in the “right” symbol display area 9R. Here, as shown in FIG. 38 (E1), the effect symbol that is temporarily stopped and displayed in the “right” symbol display area 9R is determined based on, for example, the determined right final stop symbol FZ1-2 (see FIG. 38). 48). Then, for example, as shown in FIG. 38 (E4), after the effect symbol “4” is stopped and displayed in the “medium” symbol display area 9C (temporary stop display), the effect symbol that is a non-reach combination is stopped. Displayed (final stop display).

  39 to 41 are explanatory diagrams illustrating display operation examples when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is other than “surprise”. In the example shown in FIG. 39 (A), for example, the symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R of “left”, “middle”, and “right” correspond to the start of variation of the special symbol in the variable symbol special display. In all, the production design changes. After that, as shown in FIG. 39B, the effect symbol “6” is stopped and displayed (temporary stop display) in the symbol display area 9L of “left”.

  And, for example, when the specific effect of “slip” is executed as in the case where the variation pattern is Super PA4-2, as shown in FIGS. 39 (C1) to (C3), “Left” and After the effect symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the “right” symbol display areas 9L and 9R, the effect symbols are changed again in the “right” symbol display area 9R and then stopped and displayed. An effect display for changing the effect symbol to be stopped and displayed is performed so as to reach the reach state. Further, for example, when a specific effect of “pseudo-continuous” is executed as in the case where the variation pattern is Super PA 4-3, as shown in FIGS. 39D1 to 39D, all symbols are displayed. After the effect symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R, effect display is performed in which the effect symbols are changed again (pseudo continuous change) in all the symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R. After that, the effect symbols “6” in the “left” and “right” symbol display areas 9L and 9R are all stopped and displayed (temporary stop display), and the effect symbol variable display state becomes the reach state.

  In the reach state as shown in FIG. 39 (C3) and FIG. 39 (D5), as shown in FIG. 40 (A), the changing speed of the effect symbol in the “medium” symbol display area 9C decreases. . When the variation pattern is any one of normal PA2-5 to normal PA2-8, as shown in FIG. 40B, the number “6” in the “medium” symbol display area 9C is “ A “normal” reach effect that is stopped (temporarily stopped) together with the “left” and “right” symbol display areas 9L and 9R is performed. In the example shown in FIG. 40B, in response to the case where the variable display result is “big hit”, the effect symbols constituting the big hit combination are stopped and displayed, but the variable display result is “out”. In such a case, for example, as shown in FIG. 40 (H), after displaying an effect image indicating that the number indicating “5” is stopped and displayed in the symbol display area 9C having “medium”, “medium” is displayed. Reach out of the reach combination by stopping and displaying the effect symbols other than the number indicating “6” in the “medium” symbol display area 9C, such as stopping the effect symbol number “5” in the symbol display area 9C. It is only necessary to stop and display the effect symbols constituting the, and end the variable display of the effect symbols. When reach production α1 to reach production α3, reach production β1, and reach production β2 are executed, as shown in FIG. 40 (C), the fluctuation of the production symbols in the “medium” symbol display area 9C that has been reduced. The speed increases again, and various reach effects are displayed. In the reach effect β1, after the character image CH2 as shown in FIG. 40D is displayed, the corresponding reach effect display proceeds. Further, in the case of any one of the reach effects α1 to the reach effects α3, after the character image CH1 as shown in FIG. 40 (E) is displayed, the reach effect display as shown in FIG. 40 (F) proceeds. To do. Then, in the reach effect α1, as shown in FIG. 40 (G), an effect symbol that is stopped and displayed (temporary stop display) in the first stage effect display appears. In the example shown in FIG. 40G, the effect symbols constituting the jackpot combination are stopped and displayed in correspondence with the case where the variable display result is “big hit”, but the variable display result becomes “out”. In such a case, it is only necessary to stop and display the effect symbols constituting the reach-rejected combination and end the variable display of the effect symbols. On the other hand, in the reach effect α2 and the reach effect α3, as shown in FIGS. 40 (H) and (I), the process proceeds to the second stage effect display. Further, in the reach effect β2, after the character image CH3 as shown in FIG. 40 (J) is displayed, the corresponding reach effect display proceeds.

  When the second stage effect display proceeds as shown in FIG. 40 (I), if the reach effect α2 is reached, as shown in FIG. 41 (A), the second stage effect display is stopped (temporary stop display). The directed design appears. When the variable display result is “out of”, the displayed effect symbols are not changed, the effect symbols constituting the reach-out combination are stopped and displayed, and the effect symbol variable display is ended. In the reach effect α3, for example, the process proceeds to a third stage effect display (also referred to as “relief effect”). Then, an effect symbol that is stopped (temporarily stopped) in the third stage effect display appears. Thereafter, the effect symbol is stopped and displayed. Note that the third stage effect display in the reach effect α3 is not shown in FIGS.

  Next, the operation of the effect control means will be described. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the effect control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the effect control CPU 101) as effect control means mounted on the effect control board 80. The effect control CPU 101 starts executing the main process when the power is turned on. In the main processing, first, initialization processing is performed for clearing the RAM area, setting various initial values, and initializing a timer for determining the activation control activation interval (for example, 2 ms) (step S701). . Thereafter, the effect control CPU 101 proceeds to a loop process for monitoring a timer interrupt flag (step S702). When a timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 101 sets a timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. If the timer interrupt flag is set in the main process, the effect control CPU 101 clears the flag (step S703) and executes the effect control process of steps S704 to S709.

  In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 101 first analyzes the received effect control command and performs a process of setting a flag according to the received effect control command (command analysis process: step S704). Next, the effect control CPU 101 performs effect control process processing (step S705). In the effect control process, the process corresponding to the current control state (effect control process flag) is selected from the processes corresponding to the control state, and display control of the effect display device 9 is executed.

  Next, a first decorative symbol display control process is performed (step S706). In the first decorative symbol display control process, display control of the first decorative symbol display 9a is executed. Further, a second decorative symbol display control process is performed (step S707). In the second decorative symbol display control process, display control of the second decorative symbol display 9b is executed. Further, a hold storage display control process for controlling the display state of the combined hold storage display unit 18c is executed (step S708). Furthermore, a random number update process for updating a count value of a counter for generating a random number used for determining a production mode or the like is executed (step S709). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S702. As in the special symbol process executed by the game control microcomputer 560, the first ornament symbol display control process and the second ornament symbol display control process are made common, that is, realized by one program module. Thus, the capacity of the program executed by the production control microcomputer 100 may be reduced.

  43 to 45 are flowcharts showing specific examples of command analysis processing (step S704). The effect control command received from the main board 31 is stored in the reception command buffer, but in the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 101 confirms the content of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

  In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 101 first checks whether or not a reception command is stored in a command reception buffer formed in the RAM (step S611). Whether it is stored or not is determined by comparing the value of the command reception number counter with the read pointer. The case where both match is the case where the received command is not stored. When the reception command is stored in the command reception buffer, the effect control CPU 101 reads the reception command from the command reception buffer (step S612). When read, the value of the read pointer is incremented by +2 (step S613). The reason for +2 is that 2 bytes (1 command) are read at a time.

  As the command reception buffer, for example, a command reception buffer in a ring buffer format capable of storing six 2-byte configuration effect control commands is used. Therefore, the command reception buffer is configured by a 12-byte area of reception command buffers 1 to 12. A command reception number counter indicating in which area the received command is stored is used. The command reception number counter takes a value from 0 to 11. The ring buffer format is not necessarily required.

  The effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 is received by an interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal and stored in the command reception buffer. In the command analysis processing, which command (see FIG. 24) is the rendering control command stored in the buffer area is analyzed.

  If the received effect control command is a variation pattern command (step S614), the effect control CPU 101 stores the variation pattern command in a variation pattern command storage area formed in the RAM (step S615). Then, a variation pattern command reception flag is set (step S616).

  If the received effect control command is a display result specifying command (step S617), the effect control CPU 101 forms the display result specifying command (one of display result 1 specifying command to display result 5 specifying command) in the RAM. The displayed display result specifying command storage area is stored (step S618).

  If the received effect control command is a symbol confirmation designation command (step S621), the effect control CPU 101 sets a confirmed command reception flag (step S622).

  If the received effect control command is a jackpot start 1 designation command or a jackpot start 2 designation command (step S623), the effect control CPU 101 sets a jackpot start 1 designation command reception flag or a jackpot start 2 designation command reception flag ( Step S624). If the received effect control command is a small hit / surprise start designation command (step S625), the effect control CPU 101 sets a small hit / surprise start designation command reception flag (step S626).

  If the received effect control command is the first symbol variation designation command (step S627), the first symbol variation designation command reception flag is set (step S628). If the received effect control command is the second symbol variation designation command (step S629), the second symbol variation designation command reception flag is set (step S630).

  If the received effect control command is a power-on specification command (initialization specification command) (step S631), the effect control CPU 101 displays an initial screen on the effect display device 9 indicating that the initialization process has been executed. Control is performed (step S632). The initial screen includes an initial display of predetermined production symbols.

  If the received effect control command is a power failure recovery designation command (step S633), a predetermined power failure recovery screen (screen for displaying information notifying the player that the gaming state is continuing) is displayed. Display control is performed (step S634).

  If the received effect control command is a jackpot end 1 designation command or a jackpot end 2 designation command (step S641), the effect control CPU 101 sets a jackpot end 1 designation command reception flag or a jackpot end 2 designation command reception flag ( Step S642). If the received effect control command is a small hit / abrupt end specification command (step S643), the effect control CPU 101 sets a small hit / abrupt end specification command reception flag (step S644).

  If the received effect control command is a special winning opening open designation command (step S645), the production control CPU 101 sets a special winning opening open flag (step S646). Further, if the received effect control command is a designation command after opening the big prize opening (step S647), the production control CPU 101 sets a flag after opening the big prize opening (step S648).

  If the received effect control command is the first probability variation state designation command (step S649), the effect control CPU 101 indicates that the transition to the probability variation state has been made after the end of 15 rounds based on the probability variation big hit. A one-probability change state flag is set (step S650).

  If the received effect control command is the second probability variation state designation command (step S651), the effect control CPU 101 indicates that the transition to the probability variation state has been made after the end of two rounds of jackpot based on the sudden probability variation jackpot. A second certain change state flag is set (step S652).

  If the received effect control command is a probability change end designation command (step S653), the effect control CPU 101 determines that the probability change game state has ended and resets the first probability change state flag or the second probability change state flag (step S653). S654).

  If the received effect control command is another command, effect control CPU 101 sets a flag corresponding to the received effect control command (step S655). Then, control goes to a step S611.

  FIG. 46 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a variable display mode of decorative symbols (first decorative symbol and second decorative symbol). In this embodiment, the first decorative symbol display 9a and the second decorative symbol display 9b are composed of two LEDs. And as shown in FIG. 46, it lights alternately every predetermined time (for example, 0.5 second). When the display result of the special symbol is a jackpot symbol, the upper LED is turned on as a display result of a decorative symbol reminiscent of the jackpot (see FIG. 46A). In addition, when the display result of the special symbol is changed to the off symbol, the lower LED is turned on as the display result of the decorative symbol reminiscent of the off symbol (see FIG. 46B).

  FIG. 47 is an explanatory diagram showing random numbers used by the production control microcomputer 100. As shown in FIG. 47, in this embodiment, the production control microcomputer 100 includes random numbers SR1-1 to SR1-3 for determining the first to third final stop symbols, random numbers for determining the temporary stop symbol at the time of sliding. SR3, random number SR4-1 for determining the temporary stop symbol at the time of first pseudo change, random number SR4-2 for determining the temporary stop symbol at the time of second pseudo change, random number SR5-1 for determining the notice type, and determining the notice effect Random number SR5-2, random number SR5-3 for second step-up notice determination, random number SR5-4 for movable object notice determination, random number SR5-5 for frame notice decision, random number SR5-6 for mini character notice decision, The random number SR5-7 for determining the effect blade role notice, the random number SR6-1 for determining the first specific effect (slip) pattern, and the random numbers SR7-1 to SR7-7 for determining the motif mode are used. Note that random numbers other than these may be used in order to enhance the effect.

  The random number SR4-1 of the temporary change symbol at the time of the first quasi-continuous change is an effect symbol (temporary stop display) in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R after the first change. The random number SR4-2 of the pseudo-continuous second variation temporary stop symbol is “left”, “middle”, “right” after the subsequent re-variation to be executed. ”Is a random number used to determine a production symbol (temporary stop symbol) to be temporarily stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 9L, 9C, 9R.

  The random number SR3 for determining the sliding temporary stop symbol is used for temporarily or partially in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R when the specific effect of “sliding” is executed. It is a random number used to determine the effect symbol (temporary stop symbol) to be stopped and displayed.

  The random number SR5-1 for determining the notice type is a random number used for determining whether the type of the notice effect is the first step-up notice effect or the button notice effect. The random number SR5-2 for determining the notice effect is a random number used for determining the notice effect according to the type of the notice effect determined using the random number SR-1. For example, when the first step-up notice effect is determined as the type of the notice effect, the effect control CPU 101 determines the content (presence / absence / effect mode) of the first step-up notice effect using the random number SR5-2. . When the button notice effect is determined as the type of the notice effect, the effect control CPU 101 uses the random number SR5-2 to indicate the content of the button notice effect (presence / email notice effect or card notice effect / effect mode). decide. The random number SR5-3 for determining the second step-up notice is a random number used for determining the content (presence / absence / effect mode) of the second step-up notice effect. The random number SR5-4 for determining the moving object notice is a random number used to determine the contents (presence / absence / effect form) of the moving object notice effect. The frame notice determination random number SR5-5 is a random number used for determining the contents (presence / absence / effect mode) of the frame notice effect. The random number SR5-6 for determining the mini character notice is a random number used for determining the contents (presence / absence / effect form) of the mini character notice effect. The random number SR5-7 for determining the effect blade role advance notice is a random number used to determine the content (presence / absence / effect mode) of the effect blade role advance notice effect. The contents of each notice effect will be described later.

  The random number SR6-1 for determining the first specific effect pattern is used to determine the specific effect pattern corresponding to the content of the effect operation when executing the specific effect of “slip” as one of a plurality of types. Random number.

  The random number SR7-1 for determining the motif mode is used to determine whether or not the ground display mode displayed on the effect display device 9 is the motif mode (in this embodiment, the arabesque motif mode described later). The random number to use. In this embodiment, when displayed in the motif mode, the ground, trees, people, seagulls, production symbols, mails, cards, etc. displayed on the display screen of the production display device 9 Displayed in a common arabesque pattern in the notice effect. Hereinafter, in this embodiment, an arabesque pattern as a motif aspect is also referred to as an arabesque motif aspect. The random number SR7-2 for determining the motif mode is a random number used to determine whether or not the display mode of the tree displayed on the effect display device 9 in the notice effect is the arabesque motif mode. The random number SR7-3 for determining the motif mode is a random number used for determining whether or not the display mode of the person displayed on the effect display device 9 in the notice effect is the arabesque motif mode. The random number SR7-4 for determining the motif mode is a random number used for determining whether or not the display mode of “gull” displayed on the effect display device 9 in the notice effect is the arabesque motif mode. The random number SR7-5 for determining the motif pattern is a random number used for determining whether or not the display pattern of the effect symbol displayed on the effect display device 9 is the arabesque motif pattern. The random number SR7-6 for determining the motif mode is a random number used for determining whether or not the display mode of the mail displayed on the effect display device 9 in the notice effect is the arabesque motif mode. The random number SR7-7 for determining the motif mode is a random number used for determining whether or not the display mode of the card displayed on the effect display device 9 in the notice effect is the arabesque motif mode. The contents of the arabesque motif will be described later.

  In the determination table stored in the ROM of the production control microcomputer 100, for example, as a table for determining a predetermined non-reach combination, for example, a final stop symbol determination table shown in FIGS. 160A to 160D are included. The final stop symbol determination table 160A shown in FIG. 48 (A) is a left final stop that becomes a finalized effect symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “left” symbol display area 9L among the predetermined effect symbols that are combinations of predetermined non-reach. It is a table referred to in order to determine the symbol FZ1-1 based on the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol. The final stop symbol determination table 160A is a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the first final stop symbol determination random number SR1-1, and the symbol number “” of the effect symbol that becomes the left final stop symbol FZ1-1. Data (determination values) corresponding to “1” to “8” are included. The final stop symbol determination table 160B shown in FIG. 48B is a right final stop that is a finalized effect symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “right” symbol display area 9R among the predetermined effect symbols that are combinations of predetermined non-reach. It is a table referred to for determining the symbol FZ1-2 based on the left final stop symbol FZ1-1 and the random number SR1-2 for determining the second final stop symbol. The final stop symbol determination table 160B includes the value of the random number SR1-2 for determining the second final stop symbol in accordance with the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the effect symbols determined as the left final stop symbol FZ1-1. It is a numerical value (determination value) to be compared, and includes data (determination value) corresponding to the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the effect symbol that becomes the right final stop symbol FZ1-2. The final stop symbol determination table 160C shown in FIG. 48C is a medium final stop that becomes a finalized effect symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “medium” symbol display area 9C among the predetermined effect symbols that are combinations of predetermined non-reach. It is a table referred to for determining the symbol FZ1-3 based on the left final stop symbol FZ1-1, the right final stop symbol FZ1-2, and the third final stop symbol determination random number SR1-3.

  Further, the determination table stored in the ROM of the production control microcomputer 100 includes a left / right turn determination table 161 as shown in FIG. 49, and includes a left final stop symbol FZ1-1 and a right final stop symbol FZ1-. From the combination with 2, determination is made as to which of the left and right output types DC1-1 corresponds to LR0, LR11 to LR18, and LR31 to LR38. The final stop symbol determination table 160C includes a random number SR1-3 for determining the third final stop symbol according to the determination result of whether the left / right outcome type DC1-1 corresponds to LR0, LR11 to LR18, or LR31 to LR38. And a data (determination value) corresponding to the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the effect symbols to be the middle final stop symbol FZ1-3.

  In the final stop symbol determination table 160B shown in FIG. 48B, the symbol number of the effect symbol that becomes the left final stop symbol FZ1-1 and the symbol number of the effect symbol that becomes the right final stop symbol FZ1-2 are the same. No numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the random number SR1-2 for determining the second final stop symbol is assigned. With such an assignment, when a finalized design that is a predetermined non-reach combination is determined as the final stop symbol, the finalized design combination can be prevented from being a reach combination or jackpot combination. In addition, in the final stop symbol determination table 160C shown in FIG. 48C, combinations of the left final stop symbol FZ1-1, the right final stop symbol FZ1-2, and the middle final stop symbol FZ1-3 are predetermined production symbols. A numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the random number SR1-3 for determining the third final stop symbol is not assigned to the part of the combination. For example, even if the combination is not a reach combination or a jackpot combination, the portion that becomes the pseudo-continuous chance GC1 to GC8 shown in FIG. 7 or the portion that becomes a certain non-reach combination as shown in FIG. A numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the random number SR1-3 for determining the final stop symbol is not assigned. With such an assignment, when a finalized design that is a predetermined non-reach combination is determined as the final stop symbol, the finalized design is a pseudo-continuous chance GC1 to GC8 or a certain non-reach similar to the chance. It can be made not to be a combination of.

  In addition, in the determination table stored in the ROM of the production control microcomputer 100, for example, as shown in FIG. 51A and FIG. Final stop symbol determination tables 162A and 162B are included. The final stop symbol determination table 162A shown in FIG. 51 (A) is a left final stop symbol FZ2 that is a final effect symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “left” symbol display area 9L among the final effect symbols that are combinations of reach deviation. -1 and the right final stop symbol FZ2-2, which is the final effect symbol that is stopped and displayed in the "right" symbol display area 9R, are determined based on the first final stop symbol determination random number SR1-1. It is a table that is referred to. The final stop symbol determination table 162A is a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the first final stop symbol determination random number SR1-1, and is the left final stop symbol FZ2-1 and the right final stop symbol FZ2-2. Data (determination values) corresponding to symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the same rendering symbols (left and right final stop symbols FZ2-1, FZ2-2). The final stop symbol determination table 162B shown in FIG. 51 (B) is a final final stop symbol FZ2- that becomes a finalized effect symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “medium” symbol display area 9C among the finalized effect symbols that are out of reach combinations. 3 is a table referred to for determining 3 based on the random number SR1-3 for determining the third final stop symbol. However, in FIG. 51 (B), as the data that can specify the middle final stop symbol FZ2-3, the symbol difference between the left final stop symbol FZ2-1 and the right final stop symbol FZ2-2 is shown.

  That is, the middle final stop symbol FZ2-3 that constitutes the unreachable combination is specified by a symbol difference that is a difference value from the symbol number of the effect symbol that becomes the left final stop symbol FZ2-1 or the right final stop symbol FZ2-2. The That is, in the variable display of the effect symbol, the effect symbol variation is started in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, 9R, and “left” → “right” → “middle”. When the finalized effect symbol that is the variable display result of the effect symbol is stopped and displayed in this order, the “left” and “right” symbol displays other than the “medium” symbol display area 9C where the effect symbol is stopped and displayed last. After the left and right final stop symbols FZ2-1 and FZ2-2 that are stopped and displayed in the areas 9L and 9R are determined using the final stop symbol determination table 162A, the "middle" symbol display is performed using the final stop symbol determination table 162B. A difference (design difference) between the middle final stop symbol FZ2-3 stopped and displayed in the area 9C and the left and right final stop symbols FZ2-1 and FZ2-2 is determined. In accordance with the determined symbol difference, a definite effect symbol to be the middle final stop symbol FZ2-3 that is stopped and displayed in the “medium” symbol display area 9C is determined. The final stop symbol determination table 162B is a variation pattern of normal PA2-1, normal PA2-2, special PG2-1, special PG2-2, or any of normal PA2-3 and normal PA2-4. If it is one of the fluctuation patterns of Super PA3-1 to Super PA3-3, Super PB3-1 to PB3-3, Super PC3-1 to Super PC3-4, Special PG2-3, Super PA3- 4 is a numerical value (determination value) that is compared with the value of the random number SR1-3 for determining the third final stop symbol according to any of the fluctuation patterns of the super PA 3-6, and the symbol difference “− Data (determination values) corresponding to “2”, “−1”, “+1”, “+2” are included.

  In the determination table stored in the ROM of the effect control microcomputer 100, for example, final stop symbol determination tables 163A and 163B shown in FIG. include. The final stop symbol determination tables 163A and 163B shown in FIG. 52 are the left symbols that are stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R of “left”, “middle”, and “right” as the determined effect symbols that become the big hit symbols. This table is referred to for determining the middle right final stop symbols FZ3-1, FZ3-2, and FZ3-3 based on the first final stop symbol determination random number SR1-1. The final stop symbol determination table 163A is a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the first final stop symbol determination random number SR1-1, and the left middle right final stop symbol FZ3-1, FZ3-2, FZ3. Data corresponding to the symbol numbers “1”, “2”, “3”, “4”, “5”, “6”, “7”, “8” of the normal symbols that are the same as -3 (determination value) including. The final stop symbol determination table 163B is a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the first final stop symbol determination random number SR1-1, and the left middle right final stop symbol FZ3-1, FZ3-2, FZ3. -3 includes data (determination values) corresponding to the symbol numbers “2”, “4”, “6”, and “8” of the same normal symbol. The final stop symbol determination table 163A is used when it is determined to be a probable variation big hit, and the final stop symbol determination table 163B is used when it is determined to be a normal big hit (non-probable variable big hit). used.

  Further, in the determination table stored in the ROM of the effect control microcomputer 100, for example, a specific effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 53 is used as a table for determining any one of a plurality of types of specific effect patterns. 164A is included. When the specific effect of “slip” is executed, the specific effect pattern determination table 164A shown in FIG. 53 slides the specific effect pattern based on the random number SR6-1 for determining the first specific effect pattern. It is a table referred to in order to determine any of the slips TP1-4. The specific effect pattern determination table 164A includes non-reach PA1-4, normal PA2-2, normal PA2-4, normal PA2-6, normal PA2-8, super PA3-2, super PA3-6, super PA4-2, super PA5-2, Super PB3-2, Super PB4-2, Super PB5-2, Super PC3-2, Super PC3-4, Super PD1-2, Super PE1-2, Special PG1-2, Special PG2-2, Special It is compared with the value of the random number SR6-1 for determining the first specific effect pattern according to the change pattern (see FIGS. 8 and 9) in which the specific effect of “slip” is executed, such as the change pattern of PG3-3. It is a numerical value (determination value) and includes data (determination value) corresponding to the specific effect pattern of the slip TP1-1 to the slip TP1-4.

  In the specific effect pattern of the slip TP1-1, after changing the effect symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R, the “left” and “right” symbol display areas. After the effect symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed at 9L and 9R, the effect symbols are re-fluctuated at a high speed in the “right” symbol display area 9R, and then stopped and displayed in the “right” symbol display area 9R. An effect display for changing the effect symbol to be performed is performed. In the specific effect pattern of the slip TP1-2, after changing the effect symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R, the “left” and “right” symbol display areas After the effect symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed at 9L and 9R, the effect symbols are re-fluctuated at high speed in the “left” symbol display area 9L, and then stopped and displayed in the “left” symbol display area 9L. An effect display for changing the effect symbol to be performed is performed. In the specific effect pattern of the slip TP1-3, after changing the effect symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R, the “left” and “right” symbol display areas. After the effect symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in 9L and 9R, the effect symbols are re-varied to a low speed in the “right” symbol display area 9R, and then stopped and displayed in the “right” symbol display area 9R. An effect display for changing the effect symbol to be performed is performed. In the specific effect pattern of the slip TP1-4, after changing the effect symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R, the “left” and “right” symbol display areas. After the effect symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed at 9L and 9R, the effect symbols are re-fluctuated at a low speed in the “left” symbol display area 9L, and then stopped and displayed in the “left” symbol display area 9L. An effect display for changing the effect symbol to be performed is performed.

  For example, when the variation pattern is non-reach PA1-4, depending on the previous effect value (previous effect storage data: a value indicating the variation pattern of the previous effect symbol), the slip TP1-1 to the slip TP1-4. You may make it change distribution of. As an example, the slips TP1-1 to TP1-4 that can be selected are changed according to which of the previous production values is 1 to 4. Each of 1-4 indicates each of the slip TP1-1 to the slip TP1-4. The effect control CPU 101 sets the previous effect value in the storage area in the RAM when the slip effect mode (slip TP1-1 to slip TP1-4) is determined. The specific effect pattern determination table 164A is a table to which a determination value is assigned so that the slip TP1-n is not selected when the previous determination value is n (any of n = 1 to 4). When the effect control CPU 101 determines the slip effect mode using the specific effect pattern determination table 164A configured as described above, the “slip” specific effect is executed according to the variation pattern of the non-reach PA1-4. In this case, it is possible to prevent the specific effect pattern from being the same as the specific effect pattern in the specific effect of “slip” executed last time.

  Also, instead of changing the configuration of the specific effect pattern determination table 164A, the specific effect pattern that is the same as the specific effect pattern in the specific effect of “slip” executed last time is not controlled by the control of the effect control CPU 101. You may make it do. In that case, the specific effect pattern determination table 164A illustrated in FIG. 53 is used, and the determined slip effect mode (slip TP1-1 to slip TP1-4) is specified by the previous determination value. If they match, the effect mode is replaced (for example, if the determined slip effect mode is slip TP1-n, it is replaced with slip TP1- (n + 1)).

  Further, in the determination table stored in the ROM of the effect control microcomputer 100, for example, FIG. 54 is used as a table for determining the effect symbol to be displayed temporarily when the “slip” specific effect is executed. Temporary stop symbol determination tables 166A to 166D shown in (A) to (D) are included. Each temporary stop symbol determination table 166A to 166D is used according to whether the specific effect pattern is the slip TP1-1 to the slip TP1-4 according to the table selection rule as shown in FIG. 54 (E), for example. Selected as a table. That is, when the specific performance pattern is the slip TP1-1, the temporary stop symbol determination table 166A is selected as the usage table, and when the specific effect pattern is the slip TP1-2, the temporary stop symbol determination table 166B is selected as the usage table. In the case of the slip TP1-3, the temporary stop symbol determination table 166C is selected as the use table, and in the case of the slip TP1-4, the temporary stop symbol determination table 166D is selected as the use table. The temporary stop symbol determination tables 166A to 166D are used to determine a temporary stop symbol at the time of sliding according to the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the effect symbols that will be the final stop symbols in the symbol display area where the effect symbols are changed again. It is a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the random number SR3 and includes data (determination value) corresponding to the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the effect symbols that are temporarily stopped symbols. That is, the temporary stop symbol determination table 166A has the effect symbol that becomes the right final stop symbol as the final stop symbol in the “right” symbol display area 9R in which the effect symbol is temporarily stopped according to the specific effect pattern of the slip TP1-1. According to the symbol numbers “1” to “8”, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the random number SR3 for determining the temporary stop symbol at the time of slipping, and the effect symbol of the right temporary stop symbol KZ1-1 Data (determination values) corresponding to symbol numbers “1” to “8” are included. The temporary stop symbol determination table 166B has the symbol number of the effect symbol that becomes the left final stop symbol as the final stop symbol in the “left” symbol display area 9L in which the effect symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed according to the specific effect pattern of the slip TP1-2. In accordance with “1” to “8”, a numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the value of the random number SR3 for determining the temporary stop symbol at the time of sliding, and the symbol number of the effect symbol which becomes the left temporary stop symbol KZ1-2 Data (determination values) corresponding to “1” to “8” are included. The temporary stop symbol determination table 166C has the symbol number of the effect symbol that becomes the right final stop symbol as the final stop symbol in the “right” symbol display area 9R where the effect symbol is temporarily stopped according to the specific effect pattern of the slip TP1-3. In accordance with “1” to “8”, a numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the value of the random number SR3 for determining the temporary stop symbol at the time of sliding, and the symbol number of the effect symbol that becomes the right temporary stop symbol KZ1-3 Data (determination values) corresponding to “1” to “8” are included. The temporary stop symbol determination table 166D has the symbol number of the effect symbol that becomes the left final stop symbol as the final stop symbol in the “left” symbol display area 9L where the effect symbol is temporarily stopped according to the specific effect pattern of the slip TP1-4. In accordance with “1” to “8”, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the random number SR3 for determining the temporary stop symbol at the time of sliding, and the symbol number of the effect symbol that becomes the left temporary stop symbol KZ1-4 Data (determination values) corresponding to “1” to “8” are included.

  In the determination table stored in the ROM of the effect control microcomputer 100, for example, FIG. 55 is used as a table for determining effect symbols that are temporarily stopped and displayed when a specific effect of “pseudo-continuous” is executed. Temporary stop symbol determination tables 167A to 167C shown in (A) to (C) are included. Each of the temporary stop symbol determination tables 167A to 167C indicates that the variation pattern is non-reach PA1-5, super PA3-3, super PA3-6, super PA4- 3, Super PA4-6, Super PB3-3, Super PB4-3, Super PB5-3, Special PG1-3, or execution until the final effect symbol that is the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed Is selected as a use table in accordance with the remaining number of all re-variable display operations. For example, the remaining number of re-variable display operations is “0” in the variation of the effect design (pseudo continuous variation) in which the finalized design symbol that is the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed, and the temporary stop symbol is stopped one time before that. The final stop is such that the displayed design variation (pseudo-continuous variation) is “1” and the temporary stop symbol is stopped and displayed twice before the variation (pseudo-continuous variation) is “2”. This corresponds to how many times the pseudo-continuous variation (variation in which the temporary stop symbol is stopped and displayed) is executed before the pseudo continuous variation in which the determined effect symbol that is the symbol is stopped and displayed is executed.

  As an example, the temporary stop symbol determination table 167A includes all revariable display operations that are executed until the final effect symbol that is the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed in response to the variation pattern being non-reach PA1-5. When the remaining number of times is “1”, the left temporary stop symbol KZ2-1, which is the left symbol to be temporarily stopped in the “left” symbol display area 9L, and the right to be temporarily stopped in the “right” symbol display area 9R The right temporary stop symbol KZ2-2 as the symbol, and the middle temporary stop symbol KZ2-3 as the middle symbol to be temporarily stopped and displayed in the “medium” symbol display area 9C are selected as the use table. The temporary stop symbol determination table 167B has a variation pattern of Super PA3-3, Super PA3-6, Super PA4-3, Super PA4-6, Super PB3-3, Super PB4-3, Super PB5-3, Special PG1-3 If the remaining number of re-variation display operations executed until the finalized design symbol that is the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed is “1”, the symbol “left” is displayed. In the display area 9L, the left temporary stop symbol KZ2-1, which is the left symbol to be temporarily stopped and displayed, the right temporary stop symbol KZ2-2, which is the right symbol in the “right” symbol display area 9R, and the “middle” symbol. In the display area 9C, it is selected as a use table for determining the intermediate temporary stop symbol KZ2-3, which is the intermediate symbol to be temporarily stopped and displayed.

  The temporary stop symbol determination table 167C has a variation pattern of Super PA3-3, Super PA3-6, Super PA4-3, Super PA4-6, Super PB3-3, Super PB4-3, Super PB5-3, Special PG1. If the remaining number of all re-variable display operations to be executed before the finalized design symbol that is the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed is “2” in response to being any of -3, “Left” Left temporary stop symbol KZ3-1, which is the left symbol to be temporarily stopped in the symbol display area 9L, right temporary stop symbol KZ3-2, which is the right symbol to be temporarily stopped in the "right" symbol display area 9R, and "middle". In the symbol display area 9C, the intermediate temporary stop symbol KZ3-3 that is the intermediate symbol to be temporarily stopped and displayed is selected as a use table.

  The temporary stop symbol determination table 167A shown in FIG. 55 (A) and the temporary stop symbol determination table 167B shown in FIG. 55 (B) are left final stop symbols as the final stop symbols in the “left” symbol display area 9L. A numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the random number SR4-1 for determining the first pseudo continuous temporary stop symbol in accordance with the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the effect symbol, It includes data (determination values) corresponding to pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 configured by combinations of stop symbols KZ2-1, KZ2-2, and KZ2-3. The temporary stop symbol determination table 167C shown in FIG. 55C includes a left temporary stop symbol KZ2-1, a right temporary stop symbol KZ2-2, and a middle temporary stop symbol 2-3 determined using the temporary stop symbol determination table 167B. Is a numerical value (determination value) that is compared with the value of the random number SR4-2 for determining the second pseudo-continuous temporary stop symbol, depending on which of the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 It includes data (determination values) corresponding to pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 configured by a combination of the middle right temporary stop symbols KZ3-1, KZ3-2, and KZ3-3.

  By determining the temporary stop symbol using the temporary stop symbol determination tables 167A to 167C, for example, as shown in FIG. 56, each time according to the number of times of re-variation (including initial variation) in the pseudo-continuous effect. The variation of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R can be determined as any one of the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8. .

  The control pattern table stored in the ROM of the effect control microcomputer 100 includes, for example, a symbol variation control pattern table 180 shown in FIG. In the symbol variation control pattern table 180 shown in FIG. 57, the effect symbols in the display area of the effect display device 9 in the period from when the variation of the effect symbol is started until the finalized symbol that becomes the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed. A plurality of types of data indicating control contents of various effect operations such as a variable display operation, an effect display operation in a reach effect, and an effect display operation in a specific effect are stored as symbol variation control patterns. Each symbol variation control pattern is, for example, various types according to variable display of effect symbols such as effect control process timer setting value, effect control process timer determination value, effect display control data, sound control data, lamp control data, and end code. The control data for controlling the rendering operation is included, and the contents of various rendering controls, the switching timing of the rendering control, and the like are set in time series.

  The control pattern table stored in the ROM of the effect control microcomputer 100 includes, for example, various effect control pattern tables 182 shown in FIG. A plurality of types of data indicating the contents of various types of effect control are stored as effect control patterns. Each effect control pattern includes, for example, an effect operation in a big hit game state or a small hit game state such as an effect control process timer set value, an effect control process timer determination value, an effect display control data, sound control data, lamp control data, and an end code. The contents of various production controls according to the progress of the production, switching timing of production control, and the like are set in time series.

  FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing the effect control process (step S705) in the main process shown in FIG. In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 101 performs one of steps S800 to S807 according to the value of the effect control process flag. In each process, the following process is executed.

  Fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800): It is confirmed whether or not a variation pattern command has been received from the game control microcomputer 560. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag set in the command analysis process is set. If the change pattern command has been received, the value of the effect control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the effect symbol change start process (step S801).

  Effect symbol variation start processing (step S801): Control is performed so that the variation of the effect symbol and the decorative symbol is started. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol changing process (step S802).

  Production symbol variation processing (step S802): Controls the switching timing of each variation state (variation speed) constituting the variation pattern and monitors the end of the variation time. When the variation time ends, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation stop process (step S803).

  Production symbol variation stop processing (step S803): Based on the reception of the production control command (design confirmation designation command) for instructing all symbols to stop, the variation of the production symbol (and decoration symbols) is stopped and the display result (stop symbol) ) Is derived and displayed. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot display process (step S804) or the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800).

  Big hit display processing (step S804): After the end of the variation time, control is performed to display a screen for notifying the effect display device 9 of the occurrence of big hit or small hit. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the in-round processing (step S805).

  In-round processing (step S805): Display control during round is performed. If the round end condition is satisfied, if the final round has not ended, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the post-round processing (step S806). If the final round has ended, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot end process (step S807).

  Post-round processing (step S806): Display control between rounds is performed. When the round start condition is satisfied, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the in-round process (step S805).

  Big hit end process (step S807): In the effect display device 9, display control is performed to notify the player that the big hit gaming state has ended. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800).

  FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the variation pattern command reception waiting process, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag is set (step S811). If the variation pattern command reception flag is set, the variation pattern command reception flag is reset (step S812). Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation start process (step S801) (step S813).

  61 and 62 are flowcharts showing the effect symbol variation start process (step S801) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the effect symbol variation start process, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not it is determined to be off (step S501). Whether it is determined to be out of place is determined by, for example, whether or not a display result 1 designation command is stored in the display result specifying command storage area. If it is determined to be off, it is confirmed whether a command corresponding to the non-reach fluctuation pattern is received as the fluctuation pattern command (step S502). Whether or not a command corresponding to the non-reach variation pattern has been received is determined by, for example, data stored in the variation pattern command storage area.

  If it is determined that the command corresponding to the non-reach variation pattern has been received, the effect control CPU 101 determines a stop symbol of the effect symbol that does not become reach (step S504). In the process of step S504, the final stop symbol determination table 160A shown in FIG. 48A is selected as the use table. Next, the value of the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol is extracted. Then, based on the value of the extracted random number SR1-1, the effect symbol that becomes the left final stop symbol FZ1-1 is determined by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 160A. Next, the final stop symbol determination table 160B shown in FIG. 48B is selected as the use table. Subsequently, the value of the random number SR1-2 for determining the second final stop symbol is extracted. Then, based on the value of the extracted random number SR1-2, the effect symbol to be the right final stop symbol FZ1-2 is determined by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 160B. Further, by referring to the left / right outcome determination table 161 shown in FIG. 49 based on the combination of the left final stop design FZ1-1 and the right final stop design FZ1-2, the left / right outcome type DC1-1 is Determine which of the multiple types. Next, the final stop symbol determination table 160C shown in FIG. 48C is selected as the use table. Further, the value of the random number SR1-3 for determining the third final stop symbol is extracted. Then, based on the value of the extracted random number SR1-3 and the left and right outcome type DC1-1, the effect symbol that becomes the middle final stop symbol FZ1-3 is determined by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 160C.

  In the process of step S504, by referring to the final stop symbol determination tables 160A to 160C and the left and right outcome determination table 161, the effect symbols to be the left middle right final stop symbols FZ1-1 to FZ1-3 are determined, thereby Don't make the symbol stop symbol a combination of reach or jackpot. Further, even if the combination is not a reach combination or a jackpot combination, the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 shown in FIG. 7 or a fixed non-reach combination as shown in FIG.

  When it is determined in step S502 that the pattern is not a non-reach variation pattern, the effect control CPU 101 determines a stop symbol of the effect symbols constituting the reach combination (step S505). In the process of step S505, the final stop symbol determination table 162A shown in FIG. 51A is selected as the use table. Further, the value of the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol is extracted. Then, based on the value of the extracted random number SR1-1, the same effect symbols as the left final stop symbol FZ2-1 and the right final stop symbol FZ2-2 are determined by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 162A. Next, the final stop symbol determination table 162B shown in FIG. 51 (B) is selected as the use table. Further, the value of the random number SR1-3 for determining the third final stop symbol is extracted. Then, referring to the final stop symbol determination table 162B based on the extracted random number SR1-3, the left and right final stop symbols FZ2-1 and FZ2-2 become the effect symbols and the middle final stop symbol FZ2-3. The design difference from the production design is determined. The effect control CPU 101 determines an effect symbol to be the middle final stop symbol FZ2-3 according to the determined symbol difference.

  As described above, in the process of step S505, the effect control CPU 101 first uses the final stop symbol determination table 162A to display “left” other than the “medium” symbol display area 9C where the effect symbol is stopped and displayed last. ”And“ Right ”symbol display areas 9L and 9R are determined as the left and right final stop symbols FZ2-1 and FZ2-2. Next, using the final stop symbol determination table 162B, the effect symbol which becomes the middle final stop symbol FZ2-3 in the “medium” symbol display area 9C where the effect symbol is stopped and displayed last, and the left and right final stop symbol FZ2-1. , The design difference with the effect design to be FZ2-2 is determined, and the effect design to be the middle final stop design FZ2-3 is determined according to the determined design difference.

  If it is not determined to be out of place (step S501), the production control CPU 101 determines whether or not it has been determined to be sudden or small hit (step S507). Whether or not it is determined to be a sudden or small hit is determined, for example, by whether or not a display result 4 designation command or a display result 5 designation command (see FIG. 24) is stored in the display result specifying command storage area. If it is determined that the accuracy or small hit is determined, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command is one of the variation patterns of the special PG1-1 to the special PG1-3 (step S508). . As shown in FIG. 9, the variation patterns of special PG1-1 to special PG1-3 are all variation patterns in which the variable display mode of the effect symbol is “non-reach”. If it is determined in step S508 that the variation pattern is one of special PG1-1 to special PG1-3, the process proceeds to step S504, and the effect control CPU 101 finally stops in step S504. An effect design to be a design is determined.

  If it is determined in step S508 that the variation pattern is other than the special PG1-1 to special PG1-3, the effect control CPU 101 proceeds to step S505.

  When it is not determined for the accuracy and the small hit (N in Step S507), the final stop symbol of the effect symbol of the big hit combination is determined (Step S511). In the process of step S511, the effect control CPU 101 selects the final stop symbol determination table 163A shown in FIG. When it is determined to make a big hit, the final stop symbol determination table 163B shown in FIG. 52B is selected as the use table. Further, the value of the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol is extracted. Then, based on the value of the extracted random number SR1-1, by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 163A, the combination of the left middle right final stop symbols FZ3-1, FZ3-2, and FZ3-3 that become the big hit symbol is finally determined. Determine as a stop symbol. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 52 (A), when the probability variation big hit is determined, the probability variation symbol reminiscent of the probability variation big hit (in this example, the final stop symbol on the left middle right is When the number of odd-numbered symbols is determined, and the non-probable symbol (in this example, the final stop symbol in the middle left and right is even-numbered) (Design) may be determined. Further, in this embodiment, when the normal big hit is determined, a non-probable variable symbol that reminds that it is not a probable big hit (usually a big hit) (in this example, the final stop symbol of the left middle right is an even number. The symbols in the aligned state) are determined.

In this embodiment, when it is decided to make a probabilistic big hit, the non-probable big hits such as “2”, “4”, “6”, “8” are generally used as the left middle right definite effect symbols. There are cases where a stop symbol that is reminiscent is derived and displayed (see FIG. 52A), but in the final stop symbol determination table 163A, for “2”, “4”, “6”, “8” If the decision value is not assigned and it is determined to be a probable big hit, “2”, “4”, “6”, and “8” may not be selected.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not the probability variation big hit has been determined (step S512). Whether or not it is a probable big hit is determined, for example, by whether or not a display result 3 designation command (see FIG. 24) is stored in the display result specifying command storage area. When the probability variation big hit is determined, the CPU 101 for effect control confirms whether or not the final stop symbol determined in step S511 is a non-probable variation symbol (step S513). If the final stop symbol is a non-probable variation symbol, the effect control CPU 101 sets a promotion effect execution flag indicating that the probability variation promotion effect is executed (step S514). That is, in step S513, the fact that the final stop symbol is a non-probable variation symbol is a case where the non-probability variation symbol is stopped and displayed when the variation display of the effect symbol is ended, even though it is a probability variation big hit. In this case, as will be described later, in the ending effect that is executed at the end of the big hit, a probable change promotion effect (an effect that is promoted to a probable change) that notifies that it is a probable big hit is executed. In this embodiment, the probability change promotion effect is executed as an ending effect. However, the probability change promotion effect is executed at another timing such as during a big hit game (for example, during a round effect or an interval effect). May be.

  When any one of steps S504, S505, and S514 is executed, the effect control CPU 101 then executes a specific effect setting process (step S516).

  FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing the specific effect setting process. In the specific effect setting process, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command is a variation pattern that does not include the specific effect (“slip” or “pseudo-continuous”) (step S551). ). If the variation pattern does not include the specific effect, the specific effect setting process ends.

  If the variation pattern includes a specific effect, it is determined whether or not the specific effect is “slip” (step S552). If it is the specific effect of “slip”, the effect control CPU 101 selects the specific effect pattern determination table corresponding to the specific effect as the use table (step S553). If the specific effect of “slip” is selected, the specific effect pattern determination table 164A shown in FIG. 53 is selected.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 determines the specific effect pattern as one of a plurality of types (step S554). That is, first, the value of the random number SR6-1 for determining the first specific effect pattern is extracted. Based on the value of the extracted random number SR6-1, the specific effect pattern is determined as one of the slips TP1-1 to TP1-4 by referring to the specific effect pattern determination table 164A selected in the process of step S553. To do.

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 updates the previous effect value in the predetermined area of the RAM in accordance with the specific effect pattern determined in the process of step S554 (step S555). For example, when the specific effect pattern of the slip TP1-1 is determined in the process of step S554, the previous effect value is updated to 1. When the specific effect pattern of the slip TP1-2 is determined, the previous effect value is updated to 2. When the specific effect pattern of the slip TP1-3 is determined, the previous effect value is updated to 3. When the specific effect pattern of the slip TP1-4 is determined, the previous effect value is updated to 4.

  By executing the process of step S555, it is determined each time when it is determined as one of the specific effect patterns of the slip TP1-1 to the slip TP1-4 corresponding to the variation pattern for executing the specific effect of “slip”. Updated to the previous effect value corresponding to the specific effect pattern of the slip TP1-1 to the slip TP1-4. That is, each time the effect operation in the specific effect of “slip” is determined as one of a plurality of types, data indicating the type of the determined effect operation is stored.

  When the specific effect pattern determination table 164A is a table to which a determination value is assigned so that the slip TP1-n is not selected when the previous determination value is n (any of n = 1 to 4), When the control CPU 101 determines the slip effect mode using the specific effect pattern determination table 164A configured as described above, in the process of step S554, the “slip” is specified according to the variation pattern of the non-reach PA1-4. When the effect is executed, the specific effect pattern that is the same as the specific effect pattern in the specific effect of “slip” executed last time can be prevented.

  If it is determined in step S552 that the specific effect is other than “slip” (that is, “pseudo-continuous”), the type of pseudo-continuous effect indicated by the received variation pattern command in step S555. Is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM.

  Next, when the effect control CPU 101 is the “slip” specific effect, the temporary stop symbol is displayed according to the table selection rule shown in FIG. 54E based on the specific effect pattern determined in the process of step S554. One of the determination tables 166A to 166D is selected as a use table. Further, the value of the random number SR3 for determining the temporary stop symbol at the time of sliding is extracted. The right temporary stop symbol KZ1-1, the left temporary stop symbol KZ1-2, and the right temporary stop symbol are referred to by referring to any of the selected temporary stop symbol determination tables 166A to 166D based on the value of the extracted random number SR3. The effect design which becomes either 1-3 and the left temporary stop design KZ1-4 is determined.

  The effect control CPU 101 sets the number of executions of the pseudo continuous variation specified by the received variation pattern command to a constant M in the case of the specific effect of “pseudo continuous”. For example, when the number of re-variations (not including initial variation) in the quasi-continuation is one specific effect pattern, the constant M is set to “1” and the number of re-variations (including initial variation) in the quasi-continuation. If there is no specific effect pattern twice, the constant M is set to “2”. In addition, “0” is set to the variable N indicating the determined number of combinations of temporary stop symbols. If the fluctuation pattern is non-reach PA1-5, the temporary stop symbol determination table 167A shown in FIG. 55A is selected as the use table, and the fluctuation patterns are super PA3-3 and super PA3-6. , Super PA4-3, Super PA4-6, Super PB3-3, Super PB4-3, Super PB5-3, Special PG1-3, the temporary stop shown in FIG. 55 (B) The symbol determination table 167B is selected as a use table. Further, the value of the random number SR4-1 for determining the temporary stop symbol at the time of the first pseudo change is extracted. Based on the value of the extracted random number SR4-1, any one of the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 is referred to by referring to either the selected temporary stop symbol determination table 167A or the temporary stop symbol determination table 167B. A combination of the left middle right temporary stop symbols KZ2-1, KZ2-2, and KZ2-3 is determined. Then, it is updated by adding 1 to the variable N, and it is determined whether or not the updated variable N matches the constant M.

  If the updated variable N matches the constant M, the process of step S556 is terminated. If the updated variable N does not match the constant M, the effect control CPU 101 selects the temporary stop symbol determination table 167C shown in FIG. 55C as the use table. Further, the value of the random number SR4-2 for determining the temporary stop symbol at the time of the pseudo-second variation is extracted. Then, referring to the temporary stop symbol determination table 167C based on the value of the extracted random number SR4-2, the left middle right temporary stop symbols KZ3-1 and KZ3- 2. Determine the combination of KZ3-3. Then, it is updated by adding 1 to the variable N, and it is determined whether or not the updated variable N matches the constant M. Then, the process ends.

  After executing the specific effect setting process in step S516, the effect control CPU 101 determines the effect control pattern to be one of a plurality of types (step S517). The effect control CPU 101 stores a plurality of types stored in the symbol variation control pattern table 180 shown in FIG. 57 according to the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command and the specific effect pattern determined in the process of step S516. Is selected as a usage pattern.

  In addition, the effect control CPU 101 executes a notice effect setting process for determining and setting the content of the notice effect (step S518A). The details of the notice effect setting process will be described later (see FIGS. 70 to 74).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 selects a process table corresponding to the effect control pattern and the content of the notice effect (step S518B). Then, the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table is started (step S519).

  FIG. 64 is an explanatory diagram of a configuration example of the process table. The process table is a table in which process data referred to when the effect control CPU 101 executes control of the effect device is set. That is, the effect control CPU 101 controls effect devices (effect components) such as the effect display device 9 according to the process data set in the process table. The process table includes data in which a plurality of combinations of process timer set values, display control execution data, lamp control execution data, sound number data, and movable member control data are collected. The display control execution data includes, for example, data indicating each variation mode constituting the variation mode during the variable display time (variation time) of the variable display of the effect symbol (display of the effect display device 9 in addition to the display mode of the effect symbol) (Including other aspects of the screen) Specifically, data relating to the change of the display screen of the effect display device 9 is described. Further, the production time in the production mode is set in the process timer set value. The effect control CPU 101 refers to the process table, displays the effect design in the form set in the display control execution data for the time set in the process timer set value, and displays the character image or background displayed on the display screen. Control to display. In addition, the flashing of the light emitter is controlled in a manner set in the lamp control execution data and the sound number data, and the sound output from the speaker 27 is controlled. Further, the movable member 78 and the effect blades 79a and 79b are controlled in a manner set in the movable member control data.

  The process table shown in FIG. 64 is stored in the ROM of the effect control board 80. The process table is prepared according to the contents of each effect control pattern and notice effect. The process table corresponds to more specifically the symbol variation control pattern table 180 shown in FIG. 57 and the various effect control pattern tables 182 shown in FIG. If it is determined to execute the notice effect in the process of step S518A, the data corresponding to the notice effect is set, the process table is selected, and it is not decided to execute the notice effect. The process table for which data corresponding to the notice effect is not set is selected.

  FIG. 65 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the effects executed in accordance with the contents of the process table. The effect control CPU 101 executes display control according to effect control execution data in the process table. That is, when the time according to the timer value set as the process timer set value elapses, according to the next effect control execution data in the process table, the effect display device 9, the light emitter such as the LED, the speaker 27, the movable member 78, and By repeating the process of controlling the effect blades 79a and 79b, an effect in the change of the effect symbol is realized. Note that dummy data (data not specifying control) is set in data (for example, movable member control data) corresponding to a production component that is not controlled during the variation period.

  When the effect control CPU 101 executes the process of step S519, the effect control device (the effect symbol is displayed in accordance with the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1, movable member control data 1). Control of the effect display device 9 as an effect part to be variably displayed, various lamps as an effect part, the speaker 27 as an effect part, and the movable member 78 and effect blades 79a and 79b) as effect parts. Start (step S520). For example, in accordance with the display control execution data, an instruction is output to the VDP 109 in order to display an image (including an effect symbol) corresponding to the variation pattern on the effect display device 9. In addition, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp driver board 35 in order to perform on / off control of various lamps. In addition, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the sound output board 70 in order to output sound from the speaker 27. Further, a drive signal for operating the movable member 78 is output in accordance with the movable member control data. Moreover, according to the movable member control data, a drive signal for operating the effect blades 79a and 79b is output.

  Then, a value corresponding to the variation time specified by the variation pattern command is set in the variation time timer (step S521), and the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the effect symbol changing process (step S802). (Step S522).

  Next, the contents of each notice effect in the first step-up notice and the contents of each notice effect in the second step-up notice will be described. FIG. 66 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of each notice effect in the first step-up notice and the contents of each notice effect in the second step-up notice. The first step notice (step-up notice on the right side) includes five notice effects (notice effect A, notice effect B, notice effect C, notice effect D, and notice effect E). As shown in FIG. 66, as the notice effect A, an effect in which a human character A appears from the right side of the screen in the first system notice area 91 of the display screen of the effect display device 9 and leaves to the left side of the screen is performed. As the notice effect B, an effect in which a human character B appears from the right side of the screen in the first system notice area 91 of the display screen of the effect display device 9 and leaves to the left side of the screen is performed. As the notice effect C, an effect in which a human character C appears from the right side of the screen in the first system notice area 91 of the display screen of the effect display device 9 and leaves to the left side of the screen is performed. As the notice effect D, characters A, B, and C simultaneously appear from the left of the screen in the first system notice area 91 of the display screen of the effect display device 9 and stop at the center of the screen. As the notice effect E, the effect that a large human character D appears from the right side of the screen where the characters A, B, and C are gathered in the first system notice area 91 of the display screen of the effect display device 9 is performed.

  The second step notice (left step-up notice) includes four notice effects (notice effect W, notice effect X, notice effect Y1, and notice effect Z1). In FIG. 66, illustration of the notice effects Y2 and Y3 and the notice effects Z2 and Z3 is omitted. As shown in FIG. 66, as the notice effect W, an effect in which a beetle character flies from the right side of the screen in the second system notice area 92 of the display screen of the effect display device 9 is performed. As the notice effect X, an effect in which the beetle character stays on the tree in the second system notice area 92 of the display screen of the effect display device 9 is performed. As the notice effect Y1, an effect in which the wind blows in the second system notice area 92 of the display screen of the effect display device 9 and the tree shakes is performed. As the notice effect Z1, an effect in which seagulls fly in the second system notice area 92 of the display screen of the effect display device 9 is performed.

  FIG. 67 is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the second system notice area is enlarged and displayed at the change timing of the second step-up notice effect. As shown in FIG. 67, in this embodiment, on the display screen of the effect display device 9, the first step-up notice (first system step-up notice) is displayed in the display area at the bottom of the display screen (this is the first system). The second step-up advance notice (second system step-up advance notice) is executed in the display area at the top of the display screen (area for displaying the background image). As shown in FIG. 67, when a predetermined effect in the second step-up notice (specifically, notice effects W, X, Y1, Z1) is executed, the second system notice area 92 is a small display area. However, when a specific effect (specifically, the notice effects Y2 and Z2) is executed, the second system notice area 92 is enlarged to become a large display area in order to emphasize the second step-up notice. When the second system notice area 92 is enlarged, the first system notice area 91 is slightly reduced. However, even when the second system notice area 92 is enlarged, the first system notice area 91 may not be reduced.

  FIG. 68 is an explanatory diagram showing an enlarged display mode (pattern) of the second system notice area. FIG. 69 is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the second system notice area is enlarged and displayed at a plurality of types of change timings of the second step-up notice effect. As shown in FIG. 68, in the second step-up notice, the pattern changes from step (X) to step (Y1) and then from step (Y1) to step (Z1), and from step (X) to step (Z A pattern that changes from step (Y2) to step (Z2), a pattern that changes from step (X) to step (Y1), and then changes from step (Y1) to step (Z2) , A pattern that changes from step (X) to step (Y3), then changes from step (Y3) to step (Z3), and changes from step (X) to step (Y1), and then from step (Y1) to step (Y1) The pattern changes to (Z3), and changes from step (X) to step (Y2), then from step (Y2) to step And a, a pattern that varies Z3).

  Here, as shown in FIG. 69, in the pattern that changes from step (X) to step (Y1) and then changes from step (Y1) to step (Z1), the second system notice area 92 is not enlarged. In the pattern that changes from step (X) to step (Y2) and then changes from step (Y2) to step (Z2), the second system notice area 92 is enlarged (large) when step (Y2) is executed. (The middle display area), and when the step (Z2) is executed, the second system notice area 92 remains enlarged. In the pattern that changes from step (X) to step (Y1) and then changes from step (Y1) to step (Z2), the second system notice area 92 is enlarged when step (Z2) is executed ( (It becomes the display area of medium size). In the pattern that changes from step (X) to step (Y3) and then changes from step (Y3) to step (Z3), the second system notice area 92 becomes full screen display when step (Y3) is executed. (It becomes a display area of size (large)), and when the step (Z3) is executed, the second system notice area 92 remains in full screen display.

  In addition, although not shown in FIG. 69, in the pattern which changes from step (X) to step (Y1) and then changes from step (Y1) to step (Z3), when step (Z3) is executed. The second system notice area 92 becomes full screen display (a display area of size (large)). In the pattern that changes from step (X) to step (Y2) and then changes from step (Y2) to step (Z3), the second system notice area 92 is enlarged (large) when step (Y2) is executed. When the step (Z3) is executed, the second system notice area 92 is displayed in full screen (is a large (large) display area).

  70 to 74 are flowcharts showing the notice effect setting process in step S518A. In the notice effect setting process, the effect control CPU 101 sets the notice effect type as the first step-up notice effect using the notice type determination table shown in FIG. 75 based on the random number SR5-1 for determining the notice type. It is determined whether or not to make a button notice effect (step S570). In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 75, the first step-up notice effect is determined as the type of the notice effect with a probability of 80%, and the button notice effect is determined as the type of the notice effect with a probability of 20%.

  In this embodiment, first, after determining whether the type of the notice effect is the first step-up notice effect or the button notice effect in step S570, steps S573, S576, S579, and S581, which will be described later, are shown in FIG. The mode of the first step-up notice effect is determined using the first notice setting table and the presence / absence of execution itself is also determined. A case will be described in which the presence / absence of execution is also determined. In the notice type determination table shown in FIG. 75, a determination value is assigned without a notice effect in addition to the first step up notice effect and the button notice effect, and in step S570, the kind of notice effect is increased by the first step. While determining whether to use the notice effect or the button notice effect, the presence / absence of the notice effect may be determined. In the first notice setting table shown in FIG. 77 and the button notice setting table shown in FIG. 79, the determination value is not assigned without the notice effect, and the first step is performed in steps S573, S576, S579, S581, and S583 described later. Only the aspect of the up notice effect or the form of the button notice effect may be determined. With such a configuration, the appearance rate of the notice effect can be adjusted only by changing the setting of the notice type determination table, so the adjustment of the appearance rate of the notice effect can be simplified.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not a command corresponding to the non-reach fluctuation pattern (non-reach fluctuation pattern) has been received as the fluctuation pattern command (step S571). Whether or not a command corresponding to the non-reach fluctuation pattern is received is determined by, for example, data stored in the fluctuation pattern command storage area. If it is determined that a command corresponding to the non-reach shift pattern is received (Y in step S571), the second step up is performed using the second advance setting table for non-reach shift shown in the upper left of FIG. The content (presence / absence, effect mode) of the notice effect is determined (step S572).

  In this embodiment, the step-up notice effect refers to a notice effect that changes the aspect of the effect step by step from one step to a plurality of steps according to a predetermined order. In this embodiment, when the specific display result (big hit) is used, the ratio of executing the notice effect that changes the aspect of the effect in stages up to many stages in the step-up notice effect is higher than when the specific display result is not used. .

  Note that the step-up notice effect may be such that the shape and color of one character changes, and the state of the notice means (display, sound, lamp, movable object, etc.) as seen from the player changes step by step. If it can be recognized as “step-up notice”, it can be said. For example, the number of characters increases stepwise, the number of characters that move stepwise, the number of times the character moves, the frequency, etc. increase stepwise, and the size of the character increases stepwise. May be. The same applies when the character is replaced with a movable member. In other words, when a plurality of movable members are provided, the number of movable members that move stepwise may be increased, or the number of times and the frequency of movement of the movable member may increase stepwise.

  In this embodiment, as will be described later (see FIG. 67, FIG. 106, etc.), the content of the second step-up notice effect is the display area at the top of the display screen of the effect display device 9 (second system notice area 92). The background image is gradually changed (developed, converted). Detailed contents of the second step-up notice effect will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the second non-reach off notice setting table shown in the upper left of FIG. 76, the notice effect “None”, the effect form (only the development pattern of “W”) executed only for the notice effect W, and the notice effect W are executed. After the notice effect X is executed (the development pattern of “W → X”), the notice effect X is executed after the notice effect W is executed, and then the notice effect Y1 is executed ( The development pattern of “W → X → Y1”) and the presentation pattern in which the notice effect X is executed after the notice effect W is executed, and then the notice effect Y2 is executed (the development pattern of “W → X → Y2”). ), After the notice effect W is executed, the notice effect X is executed, and then the notice effect Y3 is executed (the development pattern of “W → X → Y3”), and the notice effect W is executed. Notice effect X, notice effect Y1, notice An effect mode in which Z1 is executed in order (the development pattern of “W → X → Y1 → Z1”), and an effect mode in which the notice effect X, the notice effect Y2, and the notice effect Z2 are executed in order after the notice effect W is executed. (Development pattern of “W → X → Y2 → Z2”) and an effect mode in which the notice effect X, the notice effect Y1, and the notice effect Z2 are executed in order after the notice effect W is executed (“W → X → Y1 → Z2 "development pattern), and after the notice effect W is executed, the notice effect X, the notice effect Y3, and the notice effect Z3 are executed in order (the development pattern" W → X → Y3 → Z3 "), After the notice effect W is executed, the notice effect X, the notice effect Y1, and the notice effect Z3 are executed in order (the development pattern of “W → X → Y1 → Z3”), and after the notice effect W is executed. Notice effect X, notice effect Y2, notice effect Z3 And director embodiment, which is performed in the order (the development pattern of "W → X → Y2 → Z3"), has been set. A predetermined number of determination values are assigned to each effect mode.

  In step S572, the effect control CPU 101 extracts the value of the random number SR5-3 for determining the second step-up notice, and compares the extracted random value with the determination value set in the second notice setting table. Then, the presence / absence of the second step-up notice effect and the effect mode are determined based on the notice effect (“none”, “W”, “W → X”...) Assigned to the determination value that matches the random value. To do.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the type of the notice effect determined in step S570 is the first step-up notice effect (step S572A). If the type of the notice effect is the first step-up notice effect, the effect control CPU 101 uses the first notice setting table for non-reach deviation shown in the upper left of FIG. Presence / absence, production mode) is determined (step S573).

  In this embodiment, as will be described later (see FIG. 67, FIG. 106, etc.), the content of the first step-up notice effect is the display area at the bottom of the display screen of the effect display device 9 (first system notice area 91). In step 1, the characters (human characters) are made to appear in stages. Detailed contents of the first step-up notice effect will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the first non-reach off notice setting table shown in the upper left of FIG. 77, the notice effect “None”, the effect form (only the development pattern of “A”) executed only for the notice effect A, and the notice effect A are executed. An effect mode (the development pattern of “A → B”) in which the notice effect B is executed after that, and an effect mode in which the notice effect B is executed after the notice effect A is executed, and then the notice effect C is executed ( “A → B → C” development pattern) and after the notice effect A is executed, the notice effect B, the notice effect C, and the notice effect D are executed in order (“A → B → C → D”). Development pattern), and after the notice effect A is executed, the notice pattern B, the notice effect C, the notice effect D, and the notice effect E are executed in order (an extension pattern “A → B → C → D → E”). ) And are set. A predetermined number of determination values are assigned to each effect mode. The numbers shown in “Allocation” indicate the number of determination values assigned to each effect mode. The same applies to the other tables (FIGS. 75 to 87).

  In the first notice setting table for non-reach deviation shown in the upper left of FIG. 77, “A → B → C”, “A → B → C → D”, and “A → B → C → D → E”. On the other hand, no judgment value is assigned (the number of judgment values is 0). This is because when a reach does not occur, a notice effect more than the notice effect C does not appear, that is, when an effect more than the notice effect C appears, the occurrence of reach is determined.

  In step S573, the effect control CPU 101 extracts the value of the random number SR5-2 for determining the notice effect, and compares the extracted random value with the determination value set in the first notice setting table. Then, the presence / absence of the first step-up notice effect and the effect mode are determined based on the notice effect (“none”, “A”, “A → B”...) Assigned to the determination value that matches the random value. To do.

  In step S571, when it is determined that the command corresponding to the non-reach deviation variation pattern has not been received (N in step S571), the normal reach CPU 101 has received a command corresponding to the deviation variation pattern. Whether or not (step S574). When it is determined that the command corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of the normal reach deviation is received (Y in step S574), the effect control CPU 101 uses the second notice setting table for normal reach deviation shown in the upper right of FIG. The content (presence / absence, effect mode) of the second step-up notice effect is determined (step S575).

  In the second reach setting table for normal reach deviation shown in the upper right of FIG. 76, the same effect forms as the second reach setting table for non-reach deviation shown in the upper left of FIG. 76 are set. Each number is assigned a judgment value.

  In step S575, the effect control CPU 101 extracts the value of the random number SR5-3 for determining the second step-up notice, and compares the extracted random value with the determination value set in the second notice setting table. Then, the presence / absence of the second step-up notice effect and the effect mode are determined based on the notice effect (“none”, “W”, “W → X”...) Assigned to the determination value that matches the random value. To do.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the type of the notice effect determined in step S570 is the first step-up notice effect (step S575A). If the type of the notice effect is the first step up notice effect, the effect control CPU 101 uses the first notice setting table for normal reach deviation shown in the upper right of FIG. , The production mode) is determined (step S576).

  In the first reach setting table for normal reach deviation shown in the upper right of FIG. 77, the production mode having the same contents as the first advance setting table for non-reach deviation shown in the upper left of FIG. 77 is set. Each number is assigned a judgment value.

  Note that in the first notice setting table for normal reach deviation shown in the upper right of FIG. 77, determination values are not assigned to “A → B → C → D” and “A → B → C → D → E”. (The number of judgment values is 0). This is for the purpose of determining the occurrence of super reach when an effect greater than the notice effect D appears.

  In step S576, the effect control CPU 101 extracts the value of the random number SR5-2 for determining the notice effect, and compares the extracted random value with the determination value set in the first notice setting table. Then, the presence / absence of the first step-up notice effect and the effect mode are determined based on the notice effect (“none”, “A”, “A → B”...) Assigned to the determination value that matches the random value. To do.

  In step S574, when it is determined that the command corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of deviation from the normal reach has not been received (N in step S574), the CPU for effect control 101 has received a command corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of deviation from the super reach. Whether or not (step S577). When it is determined that the command corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach deviation is received (Y in step S577), the effect control CPU 101 uses the second notice setting table for super reach deviation shown in the lower left of FIG. Then, the content (presence / absence, effect mode) of the second step-up notice effect is determined (step S578).

  76, the second notice setting table for non-reach deviation shown in the upper left of FIG. 76 and the second notice setting table for deviation of normal reach shown in the upper right of FIG. Are produced, and a predetermined number of determination values are assigned to each production mode.

  In step S578, the effect control CPU 101 extracts the value of the random number SR5-3 for determining the second step-up notice, and compares the extracted random value with the determination value set in the second notice setting table. Then, the presence / absence of the second step-up notice effect and the effect mode are determined based on the notice effect (“none”, “W”, “W → X”...) Assigned to the determination value that matches the random value. To do.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the type of the notice effect determined in step S570 is the first step-up notice effect (step S578A). If the type of the notice effect is the first step-up notice effect, the effect control CPU 101 uses the first notice setting table for super-reach deviation shown in the lower left of FIG. Presence / absence, production mode) is determined (step S579).

  In the first advance notice setting table for super-reach deviation shown in the lower left of FIG. 77, the first advance notice setting table for non-reach deviation shown in the upper left of FIG. 77 and the first advance notice setting table for deviation of normal reach shown in the upper right of FIG. Are produced, and a predetermined number of determination values are assigned to each production mode.

  In step S579, the effect control CPU 101 extracts the value of the random number SR5-2 for determining the notice effect, and compares the extracted random value with the determination value set in the first notice setting table. Then, the presence / absence of the first step-up notice effect and the effect mode are determined based on the notice effect (“none”, “A”, “A → B”...) Assigned to the determination value that matches the random value. To do.

  In step S577, when it is determined that the CPU 101 for effect control has not received a command corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of deviation from super reach (N in step S577), it is determined that the command corresponding to the big hit fluctuation pattern has been received. Judgment is made, and the contents (presence / absence, production mode) of the second step-up notice effect are determined using the second notice setting table for jackpot shown in the lower right of FIG. 76 (step S580).

  The second jackpot setting table for big hits shown in the lower right of FIG. 76 has the same contents as the second notice setting table for non-reach shift, normal reach shift and super reach shift shown in the upper left, upper right and lower left of FIG. A production mode is set, and a predetermined number of determination values are assigned to each production mode.

  In step S580, the effect control CPU 101 extracts the value of the random number SR5-3 for determining the second step-up notice, and compares the extracted random value with the determination value set in the second notice setting table. Then, the presence / absence of the second step-up notice effect and the effect mode are determined based on the notice effect (“none”, “W”, “W → X”...) Assigned to the determination value that matches the random value. To do.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the type of the notice effect determined in step S570 is the first step-up notice effect (step S580A). If the type of the notice effect is the first step-up notice effect, the effect control CPU 101 uses the jackpot first notice setting table shown in the lower right of FIG. , The production mode) is determined (step S581).

  The first jackpot setting table for big hits shown in the lower right of FIG. 77 has the same contents as the first notice setting table for non-reach shift, normal reach shift and super reach shift shown in the upper left, upper right and lower left of FIG. A production mode is set, and a predetermined number of determination values are assigned to each production mode.

  In step S581, the effect control CPU 101 extracts the value of the random number SR5-2 for determining the notice effect, and compares the extracted random value with the determination value set in the first notice setting table. Then, the presence / absence of the first step-up notice effect and the effect mode are determined based on the notice effect (“none”, “A”, “A → B”...) Assigned to the determination value that matches the random value. To do.

  In this embodiment, the presence / absence of the step-up notice effect (first step-up notice effect, second step-up notice effect) and the effect mode are determined in the same notice setting table (first notice setting table, The second notice setting table) is used. However, the same notice setting table is not used for all types of big hits, but a notice setting table is used for each of the normal big hits, probable big hits, sudden probable big hits, and small hits. The presence / absence of the step-up notice effect (first step-up notice effect, second step-up notice effect) and the effect mode may be determined. In this case, by changing the distribution of the judgment value for the notice effect in each notice setting table, the execution ratio of the step-up notice and the appearance ratio of the effect mode can be varied according to the type of jackpot. For example, the probability variation big hit is more interesting than the normal big hit by setting a table so that patterns that continue to be stepped up, such as “A → B → C → D → E”, are easily selected. Improvement is achieved. In addition, the table is set so that “W → X → Y3 → Z3” is selected in the sudden probability variation big hit and small hit, for example, “W → X → Y3 → Z3” is not selected in the small hit. Therefore, the open state of the big prize opening is similar or the same, and suddenly it becomes a gaming state (a gaming state in which it is not possible to distinguish whether or not it is a probable change state) when the probable big hit and the small win are not distinguished. In addition, it is possible to determine whether a sudden big change or a big win has occurred suddenly in the effect mode of the notice effect, and the gameability can be improved.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 determines the contents (presence / absence, effect mode) of the movable object notice effect using the movable object notice setting table shown in FIG. 78 (step S582). Specifically, it is determined whether it is out of hit or big hit based on the contents of the fluctuation pattern based on the fluctuation pattern command or the display result (big hit judgment result) based on the display result designation command. The content (presence / absence, production mode) of the movable object notice effect is determined using the movable object notice setting table, and the content of the movable object notice effect is determined using the movable object notice setting table for the big hit in the case of a big hit. .

  In this embodiment, the movable object notice effect is not a step-up notice effect but an effect that notifies that there is a possibility of a big hit when the movable member 78 operates in a scheduled manner. That is, the movable object notice effect is not a notice effect that changes once or a plurality of times (not a notice effect that the operating member 78 changes (develops and operates) one or more times stepwise). The detailed contents of the movable object notice effect will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the movable object advance notice setting table shown in FIG. 78, the advancement effect “none”, the effect mode in which the movable member 78 operates at the first advance notice timing, and the second advance notice timing (a timing different from the first advance notice timing) are movable members. An effect mode in which the movable member 78 operates at the third notice timing (both the first notice timing and the second notice timing) is set. A predetermined number of determination values are assigned to each effect mode.

  In step S582, the effect control CPU 101 extracts the value of the random number SR5-4 for determining the movable object notice, and compares the extracted random value with the determination value set in the movable object notice setting table. Then, based on the notice effect (“none”, “first notice timing”, “second notice timing”, “third notice timing”) assigned to the determination value that matches the random value, the moving object notice effect is displayed. Presence / absence and production mode are determined.

  In addition, the content of the movable object notice effect is determined using the same big hit movable object notice setting table at the time of big hit, but depending on the type of big hit (probable big hit, normal big hit, sudden probable big hit, small hit) A plurality of movable object notice setting tables may be provided, and the contents of the movable object notice effect may be determined using a table corresponding to the type of jackpot. In this case, by changing the distribution value of each table according to the type of jackpot, the execution ratio of the movable object notice effect and the appearance ratio of the effect mode can be changed.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the type of the notice effect determined in step S570 is a button notice effect (step S582A). If the type of the notice effect is the button notice effect, the effect control CPU 101 determines the content (presence / absence, effect mode) of the button notice effect using the button notice setting table shown in FIG. 79 (step S583). Specifically, it is determined whether it is out of hit or big hit based on the contents of the fluctuation pattern based on the fluctuation pattern command or the display result (big hit judgment result) based on the display result designation command. The contents of the button notice effect are determined using the button notice setting table, and the contents of the button notice effect are determined using the button notice setting table for the big hit when the big hit.

  In this embodiment, the button notice effect is not a step-up notice effect, and the possibility of a big hit by displaying a predetermined image on the display screen of the effect display device 9 in response to the pressing operation of the operation button 120 by the player. It is an effect to notify that there is. That is, the button notice effect is not a notice effect that changes once or a plurality of times (not a notice effect that changes (develops) one or more times stepwise in accordance with the operation of the operation button 120). Detailed contents of the button notice effect will be described later with reference to FIGS. 122 and 124.

  In the button notice setting table shown in FIG. 79, the notice effect “None”, the effect form in which the first mail notice effect (the mail notice effect in the first stage of opening the mail) is executed at the early timing, and the first mail at the later timing. An effect mode in which a notice effect (e-mail notice effect) is executed, an effect mode in which a second e-mail notice effect (e-mail notification effect in two stages of opening an email) is executed at an early timing, and a second e-mail notice effect at a later time An effect mode in which (mail notice effect) is executed, an effect mode in which a card notice effect (notice effect in which a card appears) is executed at an early timing, and an effect mode in which a card notice effect is executed at a later timing Is set. A predetermined number of determination values are assigned to each effect mode.

  In step S583, the effect control CPU 101 extracts the value of the random number SR5-2 for determining the notice effect, and compares the extracted random value with the determination value set in the button notice setting table. Then, the notice effect assigned to the determination value that matches the random value (“none”, “early timing in the first mail notice”, “late time in the first mail notice”, “early timing in the second mail notice”, The presence / absence of the button notice effect and the effect mode are determined based on “slow timing by second mail notice”, “early timing by card notice”, “late timing by card notice”).

  In addition, the content of the button notice effect is determined by using the same big hit button notice setting table at the time of big hit, but depending on the type of big hit (probable big hit, normal big hit, sudden probable big hit, small hit) A button notice setting table may be provided, and the contents of the button notice effect may be determined using a table corresponding to the type of jackpot. In this case, by changing the distribution value of each table according to the type of jackpot, the execution ratio of the button notice effect and the appearance ratio of the effect mode can be changed.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 determines the presence / absence of a frame (lamp) notice effect using the frame (lamp) notice setting table shown in FIG. 80 (step S584). Specifically, it is determined whether it is out of hit or big hit based on the contents of the fluctuation pattern based on the fluctuation pattern command or the display result (big hit judgment result) based on the display result designation command. The contents (presence / absence, effect mode) of the frame notice effect are determined using the frame notice setting table, and the contents of the frame notice effect are determined using the frame notice setting table for big hits in the case of a big hit.

  In this embodiment, the frame (lamp) notice effect is not a step-up notice effect but an effect that notifies that there is a possibility of a big hit by lighting the frame lamp 28 with a predetermined lighting pattern. In other words, the frame (lamp) notice effect is not a notice effect that changes once or a plurality of times (not a notice effect that changes (develops) the lighting pattern step by step once or a plurality of times). The specific contents of the frame notice effect will be omitted.

  The frame notice setting table shown in FIG. 80 is provided with a table at the time of losing and a table at the time of big hit. In each frame notice setting table, a notice effect “none” and a frame notice effect “execution” are set. A predetermined number of determination values are assigned to “none” and “execution”, respectively. Note that the determination value is set so that the execution probability of the frame advance notice effect is higher in the case of the big hit than in the case of the loss.

  In step S584, the effect control CPU 101 extracts the value of the random number SR5-5 for frame notice determination, and compares the extracted random number value with the determination value set in the frame notice setting table. Then, the presence / absence of the frame notice effect is determined based on the notice effect (“none”, “execute”) assigned to the determination value that matches the random value.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 determines the presence or absence of the mini character notice effect using the mini character notice setting table shown in FIG. 80 (step S585). Specifically, it is determined whether it is out of hit or big hit based on the contents of the fluctuation pattern based on the fluctuation pattern command or the display result (big hit judgment result) based on the display result designation command. The content (presence / absence, production mode) of the mini character notice effect is determined using the mini character notice setting table, and the content of the mini character notice effect is determined using the mini character notice setting table for the big hit when the big hit.

  In this embodiment, the mini character notice effect is not a step-up notice effect, but a notification that there is a possibility of a big hit by displaying a mini character (an image of a character with a small size) on the display screen of the effect display device 9. Production. That is, the mini character notice effect is not a notice effect that changes once or a plurality of times (not a notice effect that changes (develops) a mini character step by step once or a plurality of times).

  The mini character notice setting table shown in FIG. 80 is provided with a table for a loss and a table for a big hit. In each mini character notice setting table, the notice effect “none” and the mini character notice effect “execution” are set. A predetermined number of determination values are assigned to “none” and “execution”, respectively. Note that the determination value is set so that the execution probability of the mini character notice notice effect is higher in the case of the big hit than in the case of the loss.

  In step S585, the effect control CPU 101 extracts the value of the random number SR5-6 for determining the mini character notice, and compares the extracted random value with the determination value set in the mini character notice setting table. Then, the presence / absence of the mini character notice effect is determined based on the notice effect (“none”, “execute”) assigned to the determination value that matches the random value.

  Note that a plurality of types of mini character notice effects are provided, and when mini character notice execution (mini character appearance) is decided, it may be determined which mini character appears. A character that can appear only at the time of a big hit may be set as the type of mini character. In addition to the jackpot notice, the mini character is a notice that suggests whether or not it will be a big hit with probability fluctuation at the time of the jackpot, a notice that suggests whether or not the fluctuation will reach, a notice that suggests whether to become super reach, It is equipped with a mini character notice of multiple systems with different targets to be notified, such as a notice suggesting whether a pseudo-ream or a slide effect will occur, and each system is selected based on the determination result of the big hit determination and the contents of the variation pattern You may do it.

  In this embodiment, the distribution value in the table is changed between the case of a loss and the case of big hit. However, in the case of big hit, the distribution value used in each of the probability variation big hit, normal big hit, sudden hit, and small hit. Different mini character notice determination tables may be provided, and the appearance and type of mini characters may be selected based on these tables. In this case, when a plurality of mini-characters are provided, a table may be provided for each system, and the appearance of each mini-character of the plurality of systems may be selected.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 determines the presence / absence of the effect blade accessory notice effect using the effect blade accessory notice setting table shown in FIG. 80 (step S586). Specifically, it is determined whether it is out of hit or big hit based on the contents of the fluctuation pattern based on the fluctuation pattern command or the display result (big hit judgment result) based on the display result designation command. The contents (presence / absence, production mode) of the production blade role announcement effect are determined using the production blade role advance notice setting table, and in the case of a big hit, the production blade role announcement setting table for the big hit is used. Determine the content of the object notice effect.

  In this embodiment, the effect blade role notice effect is not a step-up notice effect but an effect that notifies that there is a possibility of a big hit by operating the effect blade features 79a and 79b at a predetermined timing. That is to say, the effect vane effect notice effect is not a notice effect that causes the effect feather features 79a and 79b to operate once or a plurality of times. The specific details of the effect feather notice announcement will be omitted.

  The effect blade accessory notice setting table shown in FIG. 80 is provided with a table for losing and a table for jackpot. In each effect blade accessory notice setting table, the notice effect “None” and the effect blade accessory notice effect “execution” are set. A predetermined number of determination values are assigned to “none” and “execution”, respectively. Note that the determination value is set so that the execution probability of the effect blade accompaniment notice effect is higher in the case of a big hit than in the case of a loss.

  In step S586, the effect control CPU 101 extracts the value of the random number SR5-7 for determining the effect blade accessory notice, and compares the extracted random value with the determination value set in the effect blade accessory notice setting table. To do. Then, based on the notice effect (“none”, “execute”) assigned to the determination value that matches the random value, the presence / absence of the effect blade accessory notice effect is determined.

  As described above, in this embodiment, as shown in steps S570 to S586, the effect control microcomputer 100 uses the notice setting table (see FIGS. 76 to 80) set for each notice effect. Whether or not to execute each notice effect is determined individually. Therefore, the capacity of the individual notice setting table for determining the notice effect can be reduced.

  Instead of setting the notice setting table for each notice effect, a notice setting table in which a combination of a plurality of notice effects executed in this embodiment is set may be used. In this case, for example, the effect control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not to execute each of the notice effects in one determination process using a notice effect table in which a combination of a plurality of notice effects is set. It may be. In this way, a plurality of notice effects can be easily linked.

  Next, it is determined that the CPU 101 for effect control is determined to be a big hit (probable big hit or normal big hit. In this embodiment, it is assumed that sudden sudden probability big hit is not included. It is confirmed whether or not (step S587A). Whether or not it is determined to be a big hit is determined, for example, by whether or not a display result 2 designation command or a display result 3 designation command is stored in the display result specifying command storage area. When it is determined to be a big hit (Y in step S587A), the effect control CPU 101 uses the big hit motif mode setting table (for the ground) shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not the ground to be displayed in 9 is displayed in the arabesque motif mode (step S587B). On the other hand, if it is determined not to be a big hit (N in step S587A), the effect control CPU 101 uses the motif pattern setting table (for ground) shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not the ground to be displayed on the display device 9 is displayed in the arabesque motif mode (step S587C).

  In this embodiment, an effect is provided to notify that there is a possibility of a big hit by causing an arabesque motif mode to appear during the variation display of the effect symbol. The motif mode is a display mode that appears in common in each notification effect in a part of the notification display for notifying that it has been determined that the game is a big hit. Specifically, the motif mode is a predetermined pattern or color that appears in a part of the notice display. In addition to the predetermined pattern and color appearing in a part of the notice display as the motif form, the shape is also different from the normal display form (for example, a common accessory is attached to each character appearing in multiple notice effects. It is also possible to execute an effect in which the robot is made to appear in a state in which it is put on, or is made to appear in a state in which a common helmet or hat is worn. In addition, for example, in each notice effect, an example of a motif mode is executed, such as performing an effect of causing a common character (for example, a character such as a big hit) to appear as a motif mode. Absent.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not it has been decided in step S572, S575, S578, S580 to execute step W of the second step-up notice effect (step S587D). When it is determined to execute step W of the second step-up notice effect (Y in step S587D), the effect control CPU 101 determines a big hit (probable big hit or normal big hit. In this embodiment, suddenly positive change It is confirmed whether or not it is determined that the jackpot is not included (it may include a sudden probability variation jackpot) (step S587E). Whether or not it is determined to be a big hit is determined, for example, by whether or not a display result 2 designation command or a display result 3 designation command is stored in the display result specifying command storage area. When it is determined to be a big hit (Y in step S587E), the effect control CPU 101 uses the big hit motif mode setting table (for wood) shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not the tree displayed in 9 is displayed in the arabesque motif mode (step S587F). On the other hand, if it is decided not to make a big hit (N in step S587E), the effect control CPU 101 uses the motif pattern setting table (for wood) shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not the tree to be displayed on the display device 9 is displayed in the arabesque motif mode (step S587G).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not it has been decided in step S573, S576, S579, S581 to execute step B of the first step-up notice effect (step S587H). When it is decided to execute step B of the first step-up notice effect (Y in step S587H), the effect control CPU 101 determines whether it is a big hit (probable big hit or normal big hit. It is confirmed whether or not it is determined that the jackpot is not included (it may include a sudden probability variation jackpot) (step S587I). Whether or not it is determined to be a big hit is determined, for example, by whether or not a display result 2 designation command or a display result 3 designation command is stored in the display result specifying command storage area. When it is determined to be a big hit (Y in step S587I), the effect control CPU 101 uses the big hit motif mode setting table (for person) shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not the person displayed in 9 is displayed in the arabesque motif mode (step S587J). On the other hand, if it is decided not to make a big hit (N in step S587I), the effect control CPU 101 uses the motif pattern setting table (for a person) shown in FIG. 83 (B) for the effect. It is determined whether or not the person to be displayed on the display device 9 is displayed in the arabesque motif mode (step S587K).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not it has been decided in step S572, S575, S578, S580 to execute step Z1 of the second step-up notice effect (step S587L). When it is determined to execute step Z1 of the second step-up notice effect (Y in step S587L), the effect control CPU 101 determines a big hit (probable big hit or normal big hit. In this embodiment, suddenly positive change It is confirmed whether or not it is determined that the jackpot is not included (it may include a sudden probability variation jackpot) (step S587M). Whether or not it is determined to be a big hit is determined, for example, by whether or not a display result 2 designation command or a display result 3 designation command is stored in the display result specifying command storage area. If it is determined to be a big hit (Y in step S587M), the effect control CPU 101 uses the big hit motif mode setting table (for seagull) shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not the “gull” displayed in 9 is displayed in the arabesque motif mode (step S587N). On the other hand, when it is determined not to be a big hit (N in step S587M), the effect control CPU 101 uses the motif pattern setting table (for seagulls) shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not to display the “gull” displayed on the display device 9 in the arabesque motif mode (step S587O).

  Next, it is determined that the CPU 101 for effect control is determined to be a big hit (probable big hit or normal big hit. In this embodiment, it is assumed that sudden sudden probability big hit is not included. It is confirmed whether or not (step S587P). Whether or not it is determined to be a big hit is determined, for example, by whether or not a display result 2 designation command or a display result 3 designation command is stored in the display result specifying command storage area. When it is determined to be a big hit (Y in step S587P), the effect control CPU 101 uses the big hit motif mode setting table (for symbols) shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not the effect design displayed in 9 is displayed in the arabesque motif mode (step S587Q). On the other hand, if it is decided not to make a big hit (N in step S587P), the effect control CPU 101 uses the motif pattern setting table (for symbols) for erection as shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not the effect design displayed on the display device 9 is displayed in the arabesque motif mode (step S587R).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not it is decided to execute the e-mail notice effect in step S583 (step S587S). When it is determined to execute the e-mail notice effect (Y in step S587S), the effect control CPU 101 determines that it is a big hit (probable big hit or normal big hit. In this embodiment, it does not include sudden probable big hit. It is confirmed whether or not it has been determined that the sudden probability variation jackpot may be included (step S587T). Whether or not it is determined to be a big hit is determined, for example, by whether or not a display result 2 designation command or a display result 3 designation command is stored in the display result specifying command storage area. If it is determined to be a big hit (Y in step S587T), the CPU 101 for effect control uses the effect pattern setting table (for mail) shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not the mail to be displayed in 9 is displayed in the arabesque motif mode (step S587U). On the other hand, if it is decided not to win (N in Step S587T), the effect control CPU 101 uses the motif pattern setting table (for mail) shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not the mail to be displayed on the display device 9 is displayed in the arabesque motif mode (step S587V).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not it has been decided to execute the card notice effect in step S583 (step S587W). When it is decided to execute the card notice effect (Y in step S587W), the effect control CPU 101 determines that the big hit (probable big hit or normal big hit. In this embodiment, it does not include the sudden probability big hit. Note that it is confirmed whether or not it is determined that it is possible to include a sudden probability variation jackpot (step S587X). Whether or not it is determined to be a big hit is determined, for example, by whether or not a display result 2 designation command or a display result 3 designation command is stored in the display result specifying command storage area. If it is determined to be a big hit (Y in step S587X), the effect control CPU 101 uses the big hit motif mode setting table (for card) shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not the card to be displayed in 9 is displayed in the arabesque motif mode (step S587Y). On the other hand, when it is determined not to be a big hit (N in step S587X), the effect control CPU 101 uses the motif pattern setting table (for cards) for detachment shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not the card to be displayed on the display device 9 is displayed in the arabesque motif mode (step S587Z).

  Thereafter, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not the separately determined first step-up notice effect and second step-up notice effect can be combined (step S588).

  Specifically, combinations shown in FIGS. 88 to 91 are conceivable as combinations of the first step-up notice effect and the second step-up notice effect. 88 to 91 are explanatory diagrams showing whether or not the combination of the first step-up notice and the second step-up notice is possible.

  In this embodiment, as the first step-up notice effect effect form (development pattern), an effect form in which the notice effect changes twice (development in two stages) (an effect aspect of “A → B → C” or more) is executed. When this is done, the effect mode (“W → X → Y3” or “W → X → Y3 → Z3” effect mode in which the notice effect Y3 is executed as the effect mode (development pattern) of the second step-up notice effect ) Is not executed. That is, an effect mode of “A → B → C” or more in the first step-up notice effect and an effect form “W → X → Y3” or “W → X → Y3 → Z3” in the second step-up notice effect It is prohibited to run at the same time. This is because, in this embodiment, when the notice effect Y3 in the second step-up notice effect is executed, for example, as shown in (4-4) of FIG. 120, a background image representing the second step-up notice effect is displayed. Since the display is enlarged to the entire area of the display screen of the effect display device 9, the first screen is executed in the first system notice area 91 at the bottom of the display screen of the effect display device 9. This is because the notice effect “C” of the step-up notice effect cannot be executed (a character corresponding to the notice effect C cannot appear on the display screen). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 89 and FIG. 91, when an effect mode of “A → B → C” or more is determined as the effect mode of the first step-up notice effect, the effect mode of the second step-up notice effect is determined. The production mode of “W → X → Y3” or “W → X → Y3 → Z3” should not be determined.

  In addition, as an effect mode (development pattern) of the first step-up notice effect, an effect mode in which the notice effect changes three times (development in three stages) (an effect mode of “A → B → C → D” or more) is executed. When the second step-up notice effect is produced (developed pattern), the notice effect Z3 is executed (“W → X → Y3 → Z3”, “W → X → Y1 → Z3” or “W → X → Y2 → Z3 ”) is not executed. That is, an effect mode of “A → B → C → D” or more in the first step-up notice effect, an effect form “W → X → Y3 → Z3”, and “W → X → Y1 →” in the second step-up notice effect. “Z3” or “W → X → Y2 → Z3” is prohibited from being executed simultaneously. This is because, in this embodiment, when the notice effect Z3 in the second step-up notice effect is executed, for example, as shown in (4-5) of FIG. 120, the background image representing the second step-up notice effect is displayed. Since the display is enlarged to the entire area of the display screen of the effect display device 9, the first screen is executed in the first system notice area 91 at the bottom of the display screen of the effect display device 9. This is because the notice effect “D” of the step-up notice effect cannot be executed (a character corresponding to the notice effect D cannot appear on the display screen). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 91, when the production mode of “A → B → C → D” or more is determined as the production mode of the first step-up notice effect, the production mode of the second step-up notice production is “ The production mode of “W → X → Y3 → Z3”, “W → X → Y1 → Z3” or “W → X → Y2 → Z3” should not be determined.

  As described above, as the first step-up notice effect, “A → B → C” or more than “A → B → C”, “A → B → C → D”, “A → B → C → D → E ”) is determined, and the production mode“ W → X → Y3 ”and“ W → X → Y3 → Z3 ”are determined as the production mode of the second step-up notice production, and the first step-up notice production is performed. As an effect mode, an effect mode (“A → B → C → D”, “A → B → C → D → E”) or more is determined as an effect mode, and the second step-up notice effect is produced. When the production modes “W → X → Y3 → Z3”, “W → X → Y1 → Z3”, and “W → X → Y2 → Z3” are determined as the modes, as shown in FIG. 89 and FIG. It is determined that the step-up notice effect and the second step-up notice effect cannot be combined (in step S588). ). Then, a process of changing (rewriting) the effect mode of the second step-up notice effect to, for example, “W → X” in which the step-up is lowered by a predetermined level is executed (step S589). When it is determined that the combination is impossible, a process of changing (rewriting) the effect mode of the first step-up notice effect to, for example, an effect mode “A → B” in which the step-up is lowered by one or more steps is executed. You may do it.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to avoid duplication of two step-up notice effects executed on the display screen of the effect display device 9, and notice by executing two notice effects simultaneously on the display screen. Display complexity can be avoided.

  In this embodiment, when an effect aspect in which the notice effect changes twice or more (develops two or more stages) is executed as an effect aspect (development pattern) of the first step-up notice effect, that is, “A → When a production mode of “B → C” or more is executed, reach (normal reach, super reach) is always generated. Therefore, in the first notice setting table for non-reach deviation in the upper left of FIG. For this reason, when reach does not occur (when a non-reach shift pattern command is received), the reach confirmation effect mode (“A → B → C”, “A → B → C → D ”“ A → B → C → D → E ”) is not always determined.

  However, in the first notice setting table shown in the upper left of FIG. 77, the reach determination effect modes (“A → B → C”, “A → B → C → D”, “A → B → C → D → E”) are used. If it is set to allocate the determination value, it is determined in step S588 that the first step-up notice effect and the second step-up notice effect cannot be combined (the reach confirmation effect mode cannot be executed). Will do. In this case, in step S589, a process of changing (rewriting) the effect mode of the first step-up notice effect to an effect mode (for example, “A → B”) that is not reach determination is executed.

  Further, in this embodiment, when an effect mode in which the notice effect changes three times or more (development of three or more stages) is executed as the effect mode (development pattern) of the first step-up notice effect, that is, “A → When the production mode of “B → C → D” or more is executed, super reach is always generated. Therefore, in the first advance notice setting table for deviation from the normal reach in the upper right in FIG. 77, determination values are not assigned to the production modes of “A → B → C → D” or more. For this reason, when super reach does not occur (when a normal reach deviation variation pattern command is received), the reach confirmation effect mode (“A → B → C → D”, “ A → B → C → D → E ”) is not always determined.

  However, in the first notice setting table shown in the upper right of FIG. 77, determination values are assigned to the super-reach determination effect modes (“A → B → C → D”, “A → B → C → D → E”). If set, it is determined in step S588 that the first step-up notice effect and the second step-up notice effect cannot be combined (it is impossible to execute the super reach determination effect mode). In this case, in step S589, a process of changing (rewriting) the effect mode of the first step-up notice effect to an effect mode (for example, “A → B → C”) that is not super reach determination is executed.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the first certain change state flag is set (step S590). That is, it is confirmed whether or not the gaming state has been shifted to the probability changing state after the 15-round winning game based on the fact that the probability variation big hit has been reached. If the first certain change state flag is set, the CPU 101 for effect control confirms whether or not it is normally determined to be a big hit (step S591). Whether or not it is normally determined to be a big hit is determined, for example, by whether or not a display result 2 designation command is stored in the display result specifying command storage area. If it is determined to be a big jackpot, has the production control CPU 101 decided to cause one or more arabesque motif modes to appear during the variation display of one production symbol in the processing of steps S587A to S587Z? It is confirmed whether or not (step S592).

  When it is determined that one or more arabesque motif modes appear, the production control CPU 101 performs processing for changing from the arabesque motif mode to the normal display mode according to the rewrite table shown in FIG. 92 (step S593). For example, as shown in FIG. 92, when it is determined that the ground to be displayed on the screen of the effect display device 9 is displayed in the arabesque motif mode, the ground to be displayed on the screen of the effect display device 9 is normally set. The process is performed so that the display mode is changed to the display mode. For example, when it is determined that the tree displayed on the screen of the effect display device 9 is displayed in the arabesque motif mode, the tree displayed on the screen of the effect display device 9 is displayed in the normal display mode. Process to change to. For example, when it is determined that the person to be displayed on the screen of the effect display device 9 is displayed in the arabesque motif mode, the person to be displayed on the screen of the effect display device 9 is displayed in the normal display mode. Process to change to. Further, for example, when it is determined that “gull” to be displayed on the screen of the effect display device 9 is displayed in the arabesque motif mode, “gull” to be displayed on the screen of the effect display device 9 is a normal one. Processing is performed so that the display mode is changed to display. In addition, for example, when it is decided to display the effect symbol displayed on the screen of the effect display device 9 in the arabesque motif mode, the effect symbol displayed on the screen of the effect display device 9 is the normal display mode. Process to change to display in. In addition, for example, when it is decided to display the mail to be displayed on the screen of the effect display device 9 in the arabesque motif mode, the mail to be displayed on the screen of the effect display device 9 is displayed in the normal display mode. Process to change to. For example, when it is determined that the card displayed on the screen of the effect display device 9 is displayed in the arabesque motif mode, the card displayed on the screen of the effect display device 9 is displayed in the normal display mode. Process to change to.

  As described above, when the process of steps S590 to S593 is executed to control the probability variation state that has been transferred after the end of the 15 round big hit game, the probability change big hit (including sudden probability change big hit) or out ( Only when it is determined that the bonus pattern is included), an effect that causes the arabesque motif pattern to appear one or more times during the variation display of the effect pattern is executed once. It is controlled so that the motif mode does not appear. In other words, if the probability variation big hit is determined, a new probability variation state starts, and if it is determined to be out of place, the current probability variation state does not end, so that the arabesque motif mode appears more than once. Since the probability variation state ends when it is normally determined that it is a big hit, the arabesque motif mode is limited so as not to appear. By doing so, if the arabesque motif mode appears, the player can at least recognize that the probability variation state does not end, and can improve the interest in the game.

  In this embodiment, the case where it is determined whether or not it is determined in step S592 that one or more arabesque motif modes should appear is shown. ) You may make it confirm whether it appears above. And you may control so that the arabesque motif aspect made to appear by step S593 may be restrict | limited to other threshold values (for example, 2 and 3).

  Further, in this embodiment, in step S593, the case where the arabesque motif mode to be displayed is limited by changing the arabesque motif mode once determined to the normal display mode has been shown. Other restriction methods may be used such as not performing the notice effect itself.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the second probability variation state flag is set (step S594). That is, it is confirmed whether or not the game state has been changed to the probability change state after the end of the two rounds of big hit game based on the sudden probability change big hit. If the second probability variation state flag is set, the production control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the probability variation big hit is determined (step S595). Whether or not it is determined to be a probable big hit is determined by, for example, whether or not a display result 3 designation command is stored in the display result specifying command storage area. If it is determined to be a promiscuous big hit, has the production control CPU 101 decided to cause one or more arabesque motif modes to appear during one variation of the production symbol display in the processing of steps S587A to S587Z? It is confirmed whether or not (step S596).

  When it is determined that one or more arabesque motif modes will appear, the production control CPU 101 performs processing for changing from the arabesque motif mode to the normal display mode according to the rewrite table shown in FIG. 92 (step S597). For example, as shown in FIG. 92, when it is determined that the ground to be displayed on the screen of the effect display device 9 is displayed in the arabesque motif mode, the ground to be displayed on the screen of the effect display device 9 is normally set. The process is performed so that the display mode is changed to the display mode. For example, when it is determined that the tree displayed on the screen of the effect display device 9 is displayed in the arabesque motif mode, the tree displayed on the screen of the effect display device 9 is displayed in the normal display mode. Process to change to. For example, when it is determined that the person to be displayed on the screen of the effect display device 9 is displayed in the arabesque motif mode, the person to be displayed on the screen of the effect display device 9 is displayed in the normal display mode. Process to change to. Further, for example, when it is determined that “gull” to be displayed on the screen of the effect display device 9 is displayed in the arabesque motif mode, “gull” to be displayed on the screen of the effect display device 9 is a normal one. Processing is performed so that the display mode is changed to display. In addition, for example, when it is decided to display the effect symbol displayed on the screen of the effect display device 9 in the arabesque motif mode, the effect symbol displayed on the screen of the effect display device 9 is the normal display mode. Process to change to display in. In addition, for example, when it is decided to display the mail to be displayed on the screen of the effect display device 9 in the arabesque motif mode, the mail to be displayed on the screen of the effect display device 9 is displayed in the normal display mode. Process to change to. For example, when it is determined that the card displayed on the screen of the effect display device 9 is displayed in the arabesque motif mode, the card displayed on the screen of the effect display device 9 is displayed in the normal display mode. Process to change to.

  As described above, when the process of steps S594 to S597 is executed to control the probability variation state that has been transferred after the end of the two round jackpot game, only when the probability variation jackpot is determined, An effect that makes an arabesque motif appearance appear one or more times during the display of the variation of the design effect is performed. Otherwise, an arabesque motif appearance appears in other cases (usually a big hit, a sudden probable big hit, a small hit, or a loss) It is controlled not to let it. In addition, when it is suddenly determined as a probable big hit, control may be performed so as to permit execution of an effect that causes the arabesque motif mode to appear once or more.

  In this embodiment, the case where it is determined whether or not it is determined in step S596 that one or more arabesque motif modes appear is used. For example, the arabesque motif mode is set to another threshold (for example, 2 or 3). ) You may make it confirm whether it appears above. And you may control so that the arabesque motif aspect made to appear by step S593 may be restrict | limited to other threshold values (for example, 2 and 3).

  Further, in this embodiment, in step S597, the case where the arabesque motif mode that appears once is changed by changing the arabesque motif mode once determined to the normal display mode is shown, but it is determined that the arabesque motif mode appears. Other restriction methods may be used such as not performing the notice effect itself.

  If the second certain change state flag is not set (N in Step S594), it means that the gaming state is controlled to the normal state. In this case, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not it is determined to be a probable big hit (step S598). Whether or not it is determined to be a probable big hit is determined by, for example, whether or not a display result 3 designation command is stored in the display result specifying command storage area. If it is determined to be a probable big hit, the process is terminated without executing the processes of steps S599 to S603 (that is, without executing the process of limiting the arabesque motif mode to appear).

  If it is not determined to be a promising big hit, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not it is normally decided to be a big hit (step S599). Whether or not it is normally determined to be a big hit is determined, for example, by whether or not a display result 2 designation command is stored in the display result specifying command storage area. If it is determined to be a big jackpot, has the production control CPU 101 decided to cause five or more arabesque motifs to appear during one variation of the production symbol display in the processing of steps S587A to S587Z? It is confirmed whether or not (step S600).

  When it is determined that five or more arabesque motif modes appear, the effect control CPU 101 performs processing for limiting the arabesque motif modes to appear to less than five according to the rewrite table shown in FIG. 92 (step S601).

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 92, priorities are set in advance for each notice effect (including the stage before the notice and the effect symbol). For example, when the total number of arabesque motif modes to appear is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (5 in this example) in accordance with a predetermined priority order, the effect control CPU 101 first has the highest priority order as shown in FIG. When it is decided to display the ground to be displayed on the screen of the low effect display device 9 in the arabesque motif mode, the ground to be displayed on the screen of the effect display device 9 is displayed in the normal display mode. Process to change. Next, when the total number of the arabesque motif modes that still appear is greater than or equal to the predetermined number (5 in this example), the CPU 101 for effect control displays the tree to be displayed on the screen of the effect display device 9 with the next lowest priority. If it is decided to display in the form, the processing is performed so that the tree displayed on the screen of the effect display device 9 is changed to display in the normal display form.

  Next, when the total number of arabesque motif modes that still appear is greater than or equal to a predetermined number (5 in this example), the effect control CPU 101 selects a person to be displayed on the screen of the effect display device 9 with the next lowest priority. If it is decided to display in the mode, the process is performed so that the person displayed on the screen of the effect display device 9 is changed to display in the normal display mode. Or, when it is decided to display the mail to be displayed on the screen of the effect display device 9 having the same priority as that of displaying the person in the arabesque motif mode, the screen of the effect display device 9 Processing is performed so that the mail displayed above is changed to display in a normal display mode. Or, when it is decided to display the card to be displayed on the screen of the effect display device 9 having the same priority as that of displaying a person or an email in the arabesque motif mode, the effect display device 9 Processing is performed so that the card displayed on the screen is changed to display in a normal display mode.

  Next, when the total number of arabesque motif modes that still appear is greater than or equal to a predetermined number (5 in this example), the effect control CPU 101 displays “gull” to be displayed on the screen of the effect display device 9 having the next lowest priority. If it is decided to display in the arabesque motif mode, the processing is performed so that “gull” displayed on the screen of the effect display device 9 is changed to display in the normal display mode. Then, when the total number of arabesque motif modes that still appear is greater than or equal to a predetermined number (5 in this example), the effect control CPU 101 displays an effect symbol to be displayed on the screen of the effect display device 9 having the next lowest priority. When it is determined to display in the motif mode, the processing is performed so as to change the display of the effect symbol displayed on the screen of the effect display device 9 to the normal display mode.

  As described above, by performing the processing of steps S598 to S601, only when it is determined that the probable big hit, there is an effect of causing the arabesque motif mode to appear five times or more during the display of the fluctuation of one effect symbol. Otherwise, it is controlled so as to limit the arabesque motif mode to appear to less than 5 in other cases (normally big hit, sudden probability change big hit, small hit, off). If it does so, since it will be confirmed that it will be a promising big hit if five or more arabesque motif modes appear, it is possible to make the player more interested in the notice display.

  In this embodiment, the case where it is determined whether or not it is determined in step S600 that five or more arabesque motif modes appear is used. However, for example, the arabesque motif mode is set to another threshold (for example, 3 or 4). ) You may make it confirm whether it appears above. And you may control so that the arabesque motif aspect made to appear by step S601 may be restrict | limited to other threshold values (for example, 3 and 4).

  Further, in this embodiment, in step S601, the case where the arabesque motif mode that appears once is changed by changing the arabesque motif mode once determined to the normal display mode is shown, but it is determined that the arabesque motif mode appears. Other restriction methods may be used such as not performing the notice effect itself.

  If it is not determined to be a big jackpot (N in Step S599), the CPU 101 for effect control appears three or more arabesque motifs during the display of the effect pattern once in the process of Steps S587A to S587Z. It is confirmed whether or not it has been decided to do so (step S602).

  When it is determined that three or more arabesque motif modes appear, the effect control CPU 101 performs processing for limiting the arabesque motif modes to appear to less than three according to the rewrite table shown in FIG. 92 (step S603).

  For example, when the total number of arabesque motif modes to appear is greater than or equal to a predetermined number (3 in this example) according to a predetermined priority order, the effect control CPU 101 has the highest priority order as shown in FIG. When it is decided to display the ground to be displayed on the screen of the low effect display device 9 in the arabesque motif mode, the ground to be displayed on the screen of the effect display device 9 is displayed in the normal display mode. Process to change. Next, when the total number of arabesque motif modes that still appear is greater than or equal to a predetermined number (3 in this example), the CPU 101 for effect control displays a tree to be displayed on the screen of the effect display device 9 with the next lowest priority. If it is decided to display in the form, the processing is performed so that the tree displayed on the screen of the effect display device 9 is changed to display in the normal display form.

  Next, when the total number of arabesque motif modes that still appear is greater than or equal to a predetermined number (3 in this example), the effect control CPU 101 selects a person to be displayed on the screen of the effect display device 9 having the next lowest priority. If it is decided to display in the form, processing is performed so that the person displayed on the screen of the effect display device 9 is changed to display in the normal display form. Or, when it is decided to display the mail to be displayed on the screen of the effect display device 9 having the same priority as that of displaying the person in the arabesque motif mode, the screen of the effect display device 9 Processing is performed so that the mail displayed above is changed to display in a normal display mode. Or, when it is decided to display the card to be displayed on the screen of the effect display device 9 having the same priority as that of displaying a person or an email in the arabesque motif mode, the effect display device 9 Processing is performed so that the card displayed on the screen is changed to display in a normal display mode.

  Next, when the total number of arabesque motif modes that still appear is greater than or equal to a predetermined number (3 in this example), the effect control CPU 101 displays “gull” to be displayed on the screen of the effect display device 9 with the next lowest priority. If it is decided to display in the arabesque motif mode, the processing is performed so that “gull” displayed on the screen of the effect display device 9 is changed to display in the normal display mode. Then, when the total number of arabesque motif modes that still appear is greater than or equal to a predetermined number (3 in this example), the effect control CPU 101 displays an effect symbol to be displayed on the screen of the effect display device 9 with the next lowest priority. When it is determined to display in the motif mode, the processing is performed so as to change the display of the effect symbol displayed on the screen of the effect display device 9 to the normal display mode.

  As described above, the arabesque motif pattern appears three times or more during the variation display of one stage design only when the process of steps S598, S599, S602, and S603 is determined to be a big hit. In other cases (suddenly probable big hit, small hit, off), the arabesque motif mode to appear is controlled to be limited to less than 5. By doing so, it is determined that a big hit will occur if three or more arabesque motif modes appear, so that the player can be more interested in the notice display. If it is suddenly determined to be a probable big hit, the processing of steps S599 to S603 may not be executed, and the arabesque motif form to appear may not be limited.

  In this embodiment, the case where it is determined whether or not it is determined in step S602 that three or more arabesque motif modes should appear is shown. ) You may make it confirm whether it appears above. And you may control so that the arabesque motif aspect made to appear by step S603 may be restrict | limited to other threshold values (for example, 1 and 2).

  Further, in this embodiment, in step S603, the case where the arabesque motif mode to be displayed is limited by changing the arabesque motif mode once determined to the normal display mode has been shown. Other restriction methods may be used such as not performing the notice effect itself.

  The presence / absence of the notice effect and the effect aspect determined as described above are stored (set) in a predetermined storage area (notice effect storage area) of the ROM in the effect control microcomputer 100.

  Further, by executing the processing described above, in this embodiment, it is determined whether or not the arabesque motif mode appears in each notice effect using random number SR7-1 to SR7-7 for determining the motif mode. (See Steps S587A to S587Z) After that, using the rewrite table shown in FIG. 92, control is performed to switch to a normal display mode that is not an arabesque motif mode. By doing so, the number of arabesque motif modes that appear depending on whether it is a big hit or a probable big hit is limited.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 92, in the rewriting table, priorities are set in advance for each notice effect (including the display before the notice and effect symbols). Processing for limiting the number of arabesque motif modes according to the priority order is performed. In this embodiment, the priority is set so that the priority of the notice effect that is conspicuous when viewed from the player is high. For example, in this embodiment, the priority of the effect executed later in time is set to be higher. It should be noted that the priority of the step-up notice effect that makes it easy to draw attention to the player may be set to be high, or the priority of the notice effect that is displayed for a long time may be set to be high. . Further, the priority of the notice effect with a relatively large display size may be set to be high, and the priority of the notice effect executed during the reach may be set to be high. As such, by setting the priority of the notice effect that is conspicuous when viewed from the player to be high, the effect by the arabesque motif mode can be easily understood by the player.

  Conversely, the priority may be set such that the priority of the notice effect that is not noticeable from the player is high. For example, the priority of the mini character notice effect with a small display size may be set to be higher, or the priority of the effect executed first in time may be set to be higher. Further, the priority of the notice effect that is displayed for a short time may be set to be high, or the priority of the notice effect that is relatively small in display size may be set to be high. Furthermore, it may be set so that the priority of the notice effect performed before the reach is higher. In this way, by setting the priority of the notice effect that is inconspicuous from the player's standpoint, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the effect of the arabesque motif (for example, a skilled player) Only can notice).

  In this embodiment, as shown in steps S598 to S603, a case is shown in which the number of arabesque motif modes that appear depending on whether or not it is a big hit or a probable big hit is limited. However, the condition for limiting the arabesque motif mode is not limited to whether it is a big hit or a probable big hit. For example, if there are big hits with different numbers of rounds (for example, 15 round big hits and 7 round big hits), if there are 15 round big hits, more than a predetermined number (for example, 3 or 5) of arabesque motifs should appear. And the number of appearances of the arabesque motif mode may be limited to less than a predetermined number (for example, 3 or 5).

  FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol changing process (step S802) in the effect control process. In the effect symbol variation process, the effect control CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step S841) and subtracts 1 from the value of the variation time timer (step S842). When the process timer times out (step S843), the process data is switched. That is, the process timer is started again by setting the process timer setting value set next in the process table in the process timer (step S844). Further, the control state for the effect device (effect component) is changed based on the display control execution data, lamp control execution data, sound number data, and movable member control data set next (step S845). In this case, when it is determined that one or more arabesque motif modes appear in the notice effect setting process in step S518A, in step S845, the effect display device 9 displays the effect symbol variation display and the notice effect. While being executed, an effect of causing the arabesque motif mode to appear is executed. For example, an effect of displaying a ground, tree, person, seagull, effect symbol, mail or card picture displayed on the display screen of the effect display device 9 in an arabesque motif mode is performed.

  Next, in step S845, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not the step-up notice effect (first step-up notice effect, second step-up notice effect) is executed according to the contents of the process data (display control execution data or the like). Is confirmed (step S846). When the step-up notice effect is being executed (Y in step S846), the effect control CPU 101 determines whether it is the switching timing of the step-up notice effect based on the contents of the process data (step S847). If it is the step-up notice effect switching timing (Y in step S847), the effect control CPU 101 follows the contents of the process data (particularly, display control execution data including the notice effect, lamp control execution data, and movable member control data). The step-up notice effect is switched (changed, developed) (step S848).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the operation button 120 can be operated (button effective period) (step S849). The operation button 120 is effective when the button notice effect is being executed. When the button is valid (Y in step S849), the effect control CPU 101 executes a process of detecting whether or not the operation button 120 is turned on (pressed) (step S850). The on state of the operation button 120 is detected by inputting an on signal from the operation button 120. When the effect control CPU 101 detects that the operation button 120 is turned on (Y in step S850), the effect control CPU 101 executes an effect corresponding to the operation button 120 being turned on in the set button notice effect (email notice or card notice) (step S850). S851).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether it is the execution timing of the movable object notice effect based on the contents of the process data (movable member control data or the like) (step S852). If it is the execution timing of the movable object notice effect (Y in step S852), the movable member 78 is operated according to the contents of the process data (particularly, movable member control data) to execute the movable object notice effect (step S853).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not it is the execution timing of the other notice effects (frame notice effect, mini character notice effect, effect blade bonus notice effect) based on the contents of the process data (step S854). If it is the execution timing of other notice effects (Y in step S854), other notice effects are executed according to the contents of the process data (step S855). That is, the frame lamp 28 is turned on in a predetermined lighting pattern, a mini character image is displayed on the screen of the effect display device 9 at a predetermined timing, and the effect blades 79a and 79b are operated.

  If the variation time timer has timed out (step S856), the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation stop process (step S803) (step S858). Even if the variable time timer has not timed out, if the confirmation command reception flag indicating that the symbol confirmation designation command has been received is set (step S857), the process proceeds to step S848. Even if the variation time timer has not timed out, if the symbol confirmation designation command is received, the process shifts to control to stop variation.For example, a variation pattern command indicating a long variation time due to noise between substrates is received. Even in such a case, it is possible to end the variation of the effect symbol when the regular variation time has elapsed (when the variation of the special symbol ends).

  It should be noted that the fluctuation pattern including the effect of “pseudo ream” (non-reach PA1-5, super PA3-3, super PA3-6, super PB3-3, super PA4-3, super PA4-6, super PA5-3, super When executing the processes of steps S841 to S845 based on PB4-3, super PB5-3, and special PG1-3), as described above, the effect is such that multiple variations of the effect symbol are executed. Display control of the display device 9 is executed. That is, effect control data indicating the effect of the pseudo-continuous is also set in the process table corresponding to the pseudo-continuous variation pattern.

  Next, the execution timing (notification timing) of various notice effects will be described. FIG. 94 is a timing chart showing the execution timing of various notice effects. As shown in FIG. 94, the first step-up notice, the second step-up notice, the mail notice (a kind of button notice), the card notice (a kind of button notice), and the mini character notice are images displayed on the effect display device 9. These notices are called liquid crystal notices.

  In FIG. 94, all of the first step-up notice effect, the mail notice effect, and the card notice effect are shown, but in this embodiment, these notice effects are all in the vicinity of the first system notice area 91. Since it is executed, it is controlled not to be executed at the same time (see step S570).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 94, the first step-up notice is a notice of step-up in order of step (A) to step (B), step (C), step (D), step (E) (“A → B → C → D → E ”). Here, step (A) indicates the stage (period) in which the notice effect A is being executed, step (B) indicates the stage (period) in which the notice effect B is being executed, and step (C) is the notice effect. Step (D) indicates the stage (period) in which the notice effect D is being executed, and step (E) indicates the stage (period) in which the notice effect E is being executed. Is shown.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 94, the second step-up notice is stepped up from step (W) to step (X), and stepped up from step (X) to step (Y1), (Y2) or (Y3). This is a notice to step up from step (Y1), (Y2) or (Y3) to step (Z1), (Z2) or (Z3). Here, step (W) indicates a stage (period) in which the notice effect W is being executed, step (X) indicates a stage (period) in which the notice effect X is being executed, and steps (Y1), (Y2) ) Or (Y3) indicates the stage (period) in which the notice effect Y1, Y2 or Y3 is being executed, and step (Z1), (Z2) or (Z3) is the notice effect Z1, Z2 or Z3 being executed. Indicates the stage (period). In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 76, there is no provision of “W → X → Y3 → Y1” or “W → X → Y3 → Z2” effects.

  In the example shown in FIG. 94, among the plurality of notice effects, the mini character notice effect and the frame notice effect (frame flash) are the notice effects that can be executed simultaneously with the start of the change of the effect symbol in the effect display device 9. Among the plurality of notice effects, the first step-up notice effect, the second step-up notice effect, the mail notice effect (early timing), the card notice effect (early timing), the wing feather effect notice effect, and the movable object notice effect Is a notice effect that can be executed from the time when the change of the production symbol is shifted to the high-speed fluctuation. Among the plurality of notice effects, the mail notice effect (late timing) and the card notice effect (late timing) change from step (A) to step (B) in the first step-up notice effect (and the first). It is a notice effect that can be executed at the time of changing from step (W) to step (X) in the two-step-up notice effect.

  As shown in FIG. 94, the first step-up notice effect and the second step-up notice effect have the same timing at which the notice effect changes (that is, the switching timing or the development timing). Specifically, when the first step-up notice effect is executed and the second step-up notice effect is executed, step (A) changes to step (B) and step (W) changes to step (X ), Step (B) changes to step (C) and at the same time step (X) changes to step (Y1), (Y2) or (Y3), and step (C) changes to step (D) At the same time, step (Y1), (Y2) or (Y3) changes to step (Z1), (Z2) or (Z3).

  Here, the notice effect in the step-up notice of multiple systems “changes at the same timing (development, step-up)” means that the start-up effect start timing that can be perceived (recognized) by the player is simultaneous. Say. Specifically, in the effect example shown in FIG. 66, the timing at which the character A corresponding to the notice effect A appears on the screen and the timing at which the beetle character corresponding to the notice effect W appears on the screen are the same. The timing when the character B corresponding to the effect B appears on the screen and the timing when the beetle character corresponding to the notice effect X stops on the tree at the same time, the timing when the character C corresponding to the notice effect C appears on the screen and the notice effect The timing at which the tree corresponding to Y1 sways in the wind is simultaneous, and the timing at which characters A, B, and C corresponding to the notice effect D simultaneously appear on the screen and the timing that the seagull corresponding to the notice effect Z1 appears on the screen at the same time. It is.

  Note that, as in the effect example shown in FIG. 66, in the effect that the step-up is established only by the character appearing on the screen, the timing (moment) when the character appears on the screen is the effect start timing of the notice effect. In the case of a step-up notice when the screen changes, the timing (moment) when the screen changes is the start timing of the production of the notice effect. In the case of a step-up notice where the color or shape changes, the timing when the color or shape changes (moment) Is the production start timing. Also, in an effect in which step-up is established by the movement of the character, the timing at which the character's movement reaches a level (level) that can be perceived by the player is the effect start timing (for example, the position of the character, the speed of movement, the movement) When the number of times changes, the timing at which the player changes to a level that can be perceived by the player is the production start timing). In addition, even in an effect in which step-up is established by the movement of the movable member, the timing at which the movement of the movable member reaches a level (level) that can be perceived by the player is the effect start timing (for example, the position of the movable member, the speed of movement). The timing at which the player's perception changes when the number of movements changes is the stage start timing). In addition, even in an effect in which step-up is established by a change in sound, the effect start timing is a timing at which the sound change reaches a level (level) that can be perceived by the player. Further, even in an effect in which step-up is established by a change in lighting of the lamp, the timing when the change in lighting of the lamp reaches a level (level) that can be perceived by the player is the effect start timing.

  As described above, when the step changes to the step (Y3) in the second step-up advance notice, it does not change to the step (C) in the first step-up advance notice (when developed to “W → X → Y3”) 89 and FIG. 91, it does not develop until “A → B → C” (see steps S588 and S589). Further, when the step changes to step (Z3) in the second step-up notice, it does not change to step (D) in the first step-up notice (when “W → X → Y1, Y2, Y3 → Z3” is developed) As shown in FIG. 91, “A → B → C → D” is not developed: see steps S588 and S589). When the first step-up notice changes (develops) up to step (C), reach (normal reach, super reach) is determined. When the first step-up notice changes (develops) up to step (D), the super reach is determined.

  As shown in FIG. 94, in this embodiment, at the timing when step (C) in the first step-up notice and step (Y1), (Y2) or (Y3) in the second step-up notice are completed, The left symbol (first stop symbol that stops first) stops. In addition, at the timing when step (D) in the first step-up notice and step (Z1), (Z2) or (Z3) in the second step-up notice are completed, the right symbol (second stop symbol that stops second) Stops. In this way, by synchronizing the stop of the effect symbol and the execution timing of the notice effect, the player can easily recognize the step (step) of the step-up notice effect of a plurality of systems. In addition, after the left symbol is stopped, the step-up notice effect can be reduced (one), and the player can be made to pay attention to the stop symbol (right symbol, middle symbol) of the effect symbol. Furthermore, after the right symbol is stopped, the step-up notice can be prevented from being executed, and the player can be focused on the effect of the reach state.

  In the example shown in FIG. 94, the e-mail notice notifies the player that the e-mail has been received, prompts the player to operate the operation button 120, and opens the e-mail according to the operation of the operation button 120 of the player. The contents of the mail are notified, and the possibility of a big hit is recognized according to the contents of the mail. It should be noted that in the e-mail notice, “E-mail 2nd stage” is an effect of opening the e-mail in accordance with the second operation button 120 operation by the player and notifying the contents of the e-mail. In the case of “2 levels of mail”, the possibility of a big hit is higher than that of “1 level of mail”. In addition, the e-mail notice is executed at an early timing (start timing of the first step-up notice effect) and late timing (change timing from step (A) to step (B) in the first step-up notice effect) It may be executed in.

  In the example shown in FIG. 94, the card notice displays the card, prompts the player to operate the operation button 120, and releases the card according to the operation of the player's operation button 120 (that is, flips over). The content written on the card is notified, and the possibility of a big hit is recognized according to the content. Also, the card notice is executed at an early timing (start timing of the first step-up notice effect) and late timing (change timing from step (A) to step (B) in the first step-up notice effect) It may be executed in.

  In the example shown in FIG. 94, the mini character notice indicates that there is a possibility of a big hit by causing the mini character to appear on the screen of the effect display device 9 (for example, skipping a butterfly) at the start of the change of the effect symbol. To recognize.

  Also, in the example shown in FIG. 94, the effect feather accompaniment notice causes the player to recognize that there is a possibility of a big hit by operating the effect vane roles 79a and 79b when the effect symbol is changing at high speed. Let

  In the example shown in FIG. 94, the movable object notice is performed by operating the movable member 78 at the time when the change of the production symbol becomes a high-speed fluctuation (first notice timing) or the step (C) in the first step-up notice. By operating the movable member 78 at the time of execution (second notice timing) or by operating the movable member 78 at any timing (third notice timing) of the first notice timing and the second notice timing, Let the player know that there is a possibility. In this embodiment, when the movable member 78 is operated at the second notice timing than the first notice timing and at the third notice timing than the second notice timing, the possibility of a big hit is increased.

  In the example shown in FIG. 94, the frame advance notice causes the player to recognize that there is a possibility of a big hit by turning on the frame lamp 28 with a predetermined lighting pattern at the start of the change of the effect symbol.

  As shown in FIG. 94, other notices other than the step-up notice (first step-up notice and second step-up notice) are also executed at the timing of starting the notice effect in the step-up notice (change timing of the notice effect). Is configured to start. Therefore, the player can easily recognize the stage (step) of the step-up notice effect of a plurality of systems and the contents of other notice effects.

  FIG. 95 is a timing chart showing the button valid period in the button notice effect. As shown in FIG. 95, button notice (email notice, card notice) is started in synchronization with the start timing of step (W) when executed at an early timing, and step ( X) is started in synchronization with the start timing. Then, the operation of the operation button 120 is validated from the start timing of the button notice, and the button valid period is started from that time. When a predetermined period (specifically, the execution period of step (X)) elapses after the button notice starts, the button notice ends and the button valid period also ends. When the player operates the operation button 120 during the button valid period (when the operation button 120 is turned on), the mail notice changes from the message indicating that the mail has been received to the display that opens the mail, and the card notice indicates the card The display changes from the display in which the card appears to the card to rotate and release. In this embodiment, when the second-stage mail reception notification ("mail two-stage") is executed, the button valid period starts again, and mail is sent in response to the operation of the operation button 120 by the player. Is displayed. 95 shows both the e-mail notice effect and the card notice effect, but actually, it is controlled so that the e-mail notice effect and the card notice effect are not executed simultaneously (see step S583). ).

  Next, the appearance timing of the arabesque motif mode will be described. 96 to 98 are timing diagrams showing the appearance timing of the arabesque motif mode. Among these, FIG. 96 shows the appearance timing of the arabesque motif mode when the first step-up notice effect and the second step-up notice effect are executed.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 96, first, when the variation display of the effect symbol is started, it is determined to display the ground to be displayed on the screen of the effect display device 9 in the arabesque motif mode. In this case, the ground is displayed on the effect display device 9 in the arabesque motif mode before the first step-up notice effect and the second step-up notice effect are started. Next, when it is decided to display the tree to be displayed on the screen of the effect display device 9 in the arabesque motif mode, the effect display device 9 displays the arabesque motif in the step (W) of the second step-up notice effect. Trees are displayed in a manner. Next, when it is determined that the person to be displayed on the screen of the effect display device 9 is displayed in the arabesque motif mode, in the step (B) of the first step-up notice effect, the effect display device 9 is displayed with the arabesque motif. A person is displayed in a manner. Next, when it is determined to display the “gull” displayed on the screen of the effect display device 9 in the arabesque motif mode, the effect display device 9 is displayed in the second step-up notice effect step (Z1). Seagulls are displayed in an arabesque motif. Further, when it is determined to display the effect symbol displayed on the screen of the effect display device 9 in the arabesque motif mode, the step (D) of the first step-up notice effect or the second step-up notice effect is displayed. After step (Z1), until the effect symbol is stopped and displayed, the effect display device 9 displays the stop symbol of the effect symbol in the arabesque motif mode.

  In FIG. 96, the appearance timing when the arabesque motif mode appears five times is shown, but the arabesque motif mode does not always appear five times. During a single variation display of a symbol, an arabesque motif may appear only once, appear twice, appear three times, or appear four times.

  FIG. 97 shows the appearance timing of the arabesque motif mode when the mail notice effect is executed. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 97, when it is decided to display the mail to be displayed on the screen of the effect display device 9 in the arabesque motif mode, the mail notice effect is started and the mail is received. When the display to the effect is being executed, the mail is displayed on the effect display device 9 in the arabesque motif mode. In FIG. 97, only the timing for displaying the mail in the arabesque motif mode is shown, but it is decided to display the ground and the design pattern displayed on the screen of the effect display device 9 in the arabesque motif mode. In the case of being present, an effect of displaying the ground and the effect design in the arabesque motif mode may be performed at the same timing as the appearance timing shown in FIG. Further, when it is decided to execute the second step-up notice effect, it is decided to display the tree or “gull” displayed on the screen of the effect display device 9 in the arabesque motif mode. In this case, an effect of displaying a tree or “gull” in an arabesque motif may be performed at the same timing as the appearance timing shown in FIG.

  FIG. 98 shows the appearance timing of the arabesque motif when the card notice effect is executed. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 98, when it is determined to display the card displayed on the screen of the effect display device 9 in the arabesque motif mode, the card notice effect is started and the card appears. When the display is executed, the card is displayed on the effect display device 9 in the arabesque motif mode. In FIG. 98, only the timing for displaying the card in the arabesque motif mode is shown. In the case of being present, an effect of displaying the ground and the effect design in the arabesque motif mode may be performed at the same timing as the appearance timing shown in FIG. Further, when it is decided to execute the second step-up notice effect, it is decided to display the tree or “gull” displayed on the screen of the effect display device 9 in the arabesque motif mode. In this case, an effect of displaying a tree or “gull” in an arabesque motif may be performed at the same timing as the appearance timing shown in FIG.

  FIG. 99 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol variation stop process (step S803) in the effect control process. In the effect symbol variation stop process, first, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not a stop symbol display flag indicating that the stop symbol of the effect symbol is being displayed is set (step S870). If the stop symbol display flag is set, the process proceeds to step S877. In this embodiment, when a big hit symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the effect symbol, a stop symbol display flag is set in step S876. Then, the stop symbol display flag is reset when the fanfare effect is executed. Accordingly, the fact that the stop symbol display flag is set is a stage where the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed but the fanfare effect is not yet executed, and therefore the processing of displaying the stop symbol of the effect symbols in steps S871 to S876. Without execution, the process proceeds to step S877.

  When the stop symbol display flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 sets a confirmation command reception flag indicating that the effect control command (design confirmation designation command) for instructing to stop changing the effect symbol is received. It is confirmed whether or not there is (step S871). If the confirmation command reception flag is set, control is performed to stop and display the determined stop symbol (outgoing symbol, small hit symbol or big hit symbol) (step S872).

  In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 101 performs control to stop and display the effect symbol in response to receiving the symbol confirmation designation command from the game control microcomputer 560, but the variable time timer has timed out. Based on that, the effect design may be stopped and displayed.

  When the small hit symbol or the big hit display symbol is not displayed in the process of step S872 (that is, when the off-set symbol is displayed), the effect control CPU 101 uses the value of the effect control process flag to wait for the variation pattern command reception process. The value is updated according to (Step S800) (Step S874).

  When the small hit symbol or the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the process of step S872, the CPU 101 for effect control sets a stop symbol display flag (step S876) and specifies the big hit start designation indicating that the big hit start designation command has been received. Whether the command reception flag (big hit start 1 designation command reception flag or big hit start 2 designation command reception flag) or the small hit / surprise start designation command reception flag indicating that a small hit / surprise start designation command has been received is set Confirmation is made (step S877). When the big hit start designation command reception flag or the small hit / surprise start designation command reception flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 resets the stop symbol display flag (step S878), and a process table corresponding to the fanfare effect. Is selected (step S879).

  The effect control CPU 101 resets the set flag when the big hit start designation command reception flag or the small hit / coincidence start designation command reception flag is set. Also, in the processing of step S879, the effect control CPU 101 is determined to be a normal big hit or a probable big hit (specifically, when receiving a display result 2 designation command or a display result 3 designation command: FIG. 17), the process table corresponding to the “15-time open game start notification” shown in FIG. 58 is selected, and when the small hit or the sudden big hit is determined (specifically, display result 4 designation) When the command or the display result 5 designation command is received (see FIG. 24), the process table corresponding to the “twice-open game start notification (common in rush / small hit)” shown in FIG. 58 is selected. Then, the process timer is started by setting the process timer set value in the process timer (step S880), and the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1, movable member control) In accordance with data 1, the production device (production display device 9 as production component, various lamps as production component, speaker 27 as production component, movable member 78 as production component and production blade accessory 79a, 79b ) Is executed (step S881). Thereafter, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot display process (step S804) (step S882).

  FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing the jackpot display process (step S804) in the effect control process. In the big hit display process, the effect control CPU 101 first checks whether or not the big winning opening display reception flag indicating that the big winning opening display command has been received is set (step S1871). The special winning opening open display reception flag is set based on the reception of the special winning opening open display command in the command analysis process (see step S704). When the display reception flag at the time of the big prize opening is not set (N in step S1871), the effect control CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step S1872), and the effect device (in accordance with the contents of the process data n) Control of the effect display device 9, the speaker 27, the lamps 28a to 28c, etc.) is executed (step S1873). For example, the effect display device 9 displays a jackpot display symbol and performs an effect of displaying a character or character indicating that a jackpot has occurred.

  Next, the production control CPU 101 checks whether or not the process timer has timed out (step S1874), and if the process timer has timed out, switches the process data (step S1875). That is, the process data (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data) set next in the process table is switched. Then, the process timer set value in the next process data is set in the process timer, and the process timer is started (step S1876).

  When the display reception flag at the time of opening of the big prize opening is set (Y of step S1871), the effect control CPU 101 produces the effect during the round (round according to the number of rounds) based on the contents of the display command at the time of opening of the big prize opening. An effect for executing display is selected (step S1877). Next, the display reception flag when the special winning opening is opened is reset (step S1878), and the process data corresponding to the effect during the round is selected (step S1879). Then, the process timer is started (step S1880), and the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the in-round processing (step S805) (step S1881).

  FIG. 101 is a flowchart showing mid-round processing (step S805) in the effect control process. In the in-round processing, the production control CPU 101 first checks whether or not the display display flag after opening the big prize opening indicating that the display command after opening the special prize opening has been received is set (step S1901). It should be noted that the display reception flag after opening the special winning opening is set based on the reception of the display command after opening the special winning opening in the command analysis process (see step S704).

  When the display reception flag after the big prize opening is not set (N in Step S1901), the effect control CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (Step S1902), and the effect device (in accordance with the contents of the process data n) The effect display device 9, the speaker 27, the lamps 28a to 28c, etc.) are controlled (step S1903). For example, the effect display device 9 displays a jackpot symbol and executes an effect (in-round effect) for displaying characters indicating the number of rounds, other characters, and the like.

  Next, the production control CPU 101 checks whether or not the process timer has timed out (step S1904), and if the process timer has timed out, switches the process data (step S1905). That is, the process data (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data) set next in the process table is switched. Then, the process timer set value in the next process data is set in the process timer and the process timer is started (step S1906).

  When the display receiving flag after opening the big prize opening is set in step S1901 (Y in step S1901), the effect control CPU 101 performs interval production (according to the number of rounds) based on the contents of the display command after opening the big winning opening. The effect of performing the interval display is selected (step S1907). Then, the production control CPU 101 resets the display reception flag after the special winning opening is opened (step S1908), and selects the process data 1 corresponding to the interval production selected in step S1907 (step S1909). Then, the process timer is started (step S1910), and the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the round post-processing (step S806) (step S1911).

  102 and 103 are flowcharts showing the post-round processing (step S806) in the effect control process. In the round post-processing, the effect control CPU 101 first determines whether or not the jackpot end designation command reception flag (any of the jackpot end 1-2 designation command reception flags) indicating that the jackpot end designation command has been received is set. Is confirmed (step S1930). The jackpot end designation command reception flag is set based on the fact that one of the jackpot end designation commands 1 or 2 has been received in the command analysis process (see step S704).

  When the big hit end designation command reception flag is not set (N in step S1930), the presentation control CPU 101 sets the big prize opening display reception flag indicating that the big prize opening opening display command has been received. It is confirmed whether or not (step S1931). When the special winning opening display fixed reception flag is not set (N in step S1931), the effect control CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step S1932), and the effect device according to the contents of the process data n Control of the effect display device 9, the speaker 27, the lamps 28a to 28c, etc. is executed (step S1933). For example, an effect (interval effect) that displays a jackpot symbol on the effect display device 9 and displays a predetermined character or the like is executed. Further, for example, when an interval effect after the last round (15 rounds) is executed, a character string such as “15 rounds ended!” May be displayed on the effect display device 9 in step S1933, for example. Good.

  Next, the production control CPU 101 checks whether or not the process timer has timed out (step S1934), and if the process timer has timed out, switches the process data (step S1935). That is, the process data (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data) set next in the process table is switched. Then, the process timer set value in the next process data is set in the process timer and the process timer is started (step S1936).

  When the display reception flag at the time of the big winning opening is set (Y of step S1931), the effect control CPU 101 performs the effect during the round (round according to the number of rounds) based on the content of the display command at the opening of the big winning opening. An effect for executing display is selected (step S1937). Next, the display reception flag at the time of opening the special winning opening is reset (step S1938), and the process data 1 corresponding to the effect during the round selected in step S1937 is selected (step S1939). Then, the process timer is started (step S1940), and the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the in-round processing (step S805) (step S1941).

  When the jackpot end designation command reception flag is set in step S1930 (Y in step S1930), a jackpot end designation command (any one of jackpot end 1-2 designation commands) is received from the game control microcomputer 560. is there. In this case, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the promotion effect execution flag is set (step S1942A). If set, the CPU 101 for effect control selects an ending effect including a probable promotion effect (step S1942B). In other words, the fact that the promotion effect execution flag is set is a case where it is determined that the probable big hit is, but it is a case where the non-probable change symbol is stopped and displayed as a change display result of the effect symbol. Perform promotion production. If the promotion effect execution flag is not set, a normal ending effect that does not include the probability change promotion effect is selected (step S1942C).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 resets the jackpot end designation command reception flag (step S1943), and selects process data 1 corresponding to the ending effect selected in steps S1942B and S1942C (step S1944). In addition, the production control CPU 101 starts the production period measurement timer and starts the process timer (step S1945). Then, the effect control CPU 101 sets the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot end effect process (step S807) (step S1946).

  FIG. 104 is a flowchart showing the jackpot end effect process (step S807) in the effect control process. In the big hit end effect process, the effect control CPU 101 first decrements the value of the effect period measurement timer by 1 (step S971) and confirms whether or not the effect period measurement timer has timed out (step S972).

  When the production period measurement timer has not timed out (N in step S972), the production control CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step S973). Next, the effect control CPU 101 executes a process of controlling the effect devices (the effect display device 9, the speaker 27, etc.) according to the contents of the process data n (step S974). For example, by displaying that the jackpot ends or by displaying a predetermined character on the display screen of the effect display device 9 and displaying a sentence such as “See you!” As a character line, the jackpot ends. Is notified. If an ending effect including a probable promotion effect is selected, in step S974, for example, a character string such as “promote to probable change” is displayed to execute an effect as if it was promoted to probable change. To do.

  In this embodiment, the case where the probability change promotion effect is executed in the ending effect is shown. However, the execution timing of the probability change promotion effect is not limited to the time when the ending effect is executed. You may make it perform in.

  Then, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the process timer has timed out (step S975), and if the process timer has timed out, switches the process data (step S976). Then, the process timer set value in the next process data is set in the process timer and the process timer is started (step S977).

  When the production period measurement timer times out (Y in step S972), the production control CPU 101 sets the value of the production control process flag to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800) (step S978). .

  Next, specific examples of various notice effects will be described.

  First, a specific example will be described in which the first step-up notice and the second step-up notice are simultaneously executed during the same period during variable display as the first notice effect. FIG. 105 is a timing chart showing the notice timing in a specific example of the first notice effect. In the example shown in FIG. 105, the notice effect A → B → C → D → E is executed as the first step-up notice, and the notice effect W → X → Y1 → Z1 is executed as the second step-up notice, and the reach (super reach) is performed. Indicates the pattern that occurs.

  As shown in FIG. 105, the start timing of the notice effect A of the first step-up notice and the notice effect W of the second step-up notice is T1, and the notice effect B of the first step-up notice and the notice of the second step-up notice are shown. The start timing of the effect X is T2, the start timing of the notice effect C of the first step-up notice and the start timing of the notice effect Y1 of the second step-up notice is T3, the notice effect D of the first step-up notice and the second step-up notice The start timing of the notice effect Z1 is T4, the start timing of the notice effect E of the first step-up notice is T5, and the stop timing of the middle symbol (final stop symbol that stops last) is T6.

  FIG. 106 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example in which the first step-up notice and the second step-up notice are simultaneously executed during the same period during variable display as the first notice effect. As shown in FIG. 106, in the left middle right symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R, from the state where the left middle right production symbol is stopped (FIG. 106 (1-1)), all start conditions are satisfied. The variation of the production symbol is started, the variation of the production symbol becomes a high-speed variation at the timing T1, and the character A210 is used as the announcement production A in the first step-up announcement in the first system announcement area 91 of the display screen of the production display device 9. While appearing from the right side of the screen, the beetle character 220 flies from the right side of the screen as a notice effect W in the second step-up notice (1-2). Thereafter, the character A210 goes to the right of the screen.

  At time T2, the character B211 appears from the right side as the notice effect B in the first step-up notice, and the beetle character 220 stays on the tree 200 as the notice effect X in the second step-up notice (1-3). Thereafter, the character B211 goes to the right side of the screen.

  At timing T3, the character C212 appears from the right side as the notice effect C in the first step-up notice, and the effect that the wind 200 blows and the tree 200 shakes as the notice effect Y1 in the second step-up notice (1). -4). Thereafter, the character C212 goes to the right of the screen.

  At timing T4, an effect in which characters A210, B211 and C212 simultaneously appear from the left of the screen is executed as a notice effect D in the first step-up notice, and a seagull 250 flies as a notice effect Z1 in the second step-up notice. The effect to come is executed, and the left symbol (“7”) is stopped (1-5).

  At timing T5, an effect in which the character D213 appears from the left side of the screen as the notice effect E in the first step-up notice is executed, the right symbol (“7”) is stopped, and reach occurs (1-6).

  As described above, the first step-up notice and the second step-up notice change (evolve) at the same timing, so that the player can perform any kind of notice effect even if the step-up notice of another system is executed at the same time. Can be easily recognized.

  Next, a specific example when an arabesque motif mode appears in the first notice effect will be described. FIG. 107 is a timing diagram showing the appearance timing of the arabesque motif in the specific example of the first notice effect. In the example shown in FIG. 107, first, when the display of variation of the effect design is started, if it is determined to display the ground to be displayed on the screen of the effect display device 9 in the arabesque motif mode, the first Before the step-up notice effect or the second step-up notice effect is started, the ground is displayed on the effect display device 9 in the arabesque motif mode. Next, when it is decided to display the tree to be displayed on the screen of the effect display device 9 in the arabesque motif mode, the effect display device 9 displays the arabesque motif in the step (W) of the second step-up notice effect. Trees are displayed in a manner. Next, when it is determined that the person to be displayed on the screen of the effect display device 9 is displayed in the arabesque motif mode, in the step (B) of the first step-up notice effect, the effect display device 9 is displayed with the arabesque motif. A person is displayed in a manner. Next, when it is determined to display the “gull” displayed on the screen of the effect display device 9 in the arabesque motif mode, the effect display device 9 is displayed in the second step-up notice effect step (Z1). Seagulls are displayed in an arabesque motif. Further, when it is determined to display the effect symbol displayed on the screen of the effect display device 9 in the arabesque motif mode, the step (D) of the first step-up notice effect or the second step-up notice effect is displayed. After step (Z1), until the effect symbol is stopped and displayed, the effect display device 9 displays the stop symbol of the effect symbol in the arabesque motif mode.

  107 shows the appearance timing when the arabesque motif mode appears five times, but the arabesque motif mode does not always appear five times, and depending on the determination result of the notice effect setting processing, During a single variation display of a symbol, an arabesque motif may appear only once, appear twice, appear three times, or appear four times.

  FIG. 108 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example in which an arabesque motif mode appears when the first notice effect is executed. As shown in FIG. 108, in the left middle right symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R, when the left middle right production symbol is stopped (FIG. 108 (1-1)), all start conditions are satisfied. The production design changes. In this case, the ground displayed on the effect display device 9 is displayed in the arabesque motif mode before the first step-up notice effect and the second step-up notice effect are started.

  FIG. 109 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example when the ground displayed on the effect display device 9 is displayed in the arabesque motif mode. For example, when it is not decided to display the ground displayed on the screen of the effect display device 9 in the arabesque motif mode, as shown in FIG. In the case where the ground 205 is displayed with a color such as brown indicating the ground), the ground displayed on the screen of the effect display device 9 is determined to be displayed in the arabesque motif mode. As shown in FIG. 109 (B), an effect of displaying the ground 205A in an arabesque motif mode (specifically, an arabesque pattern) is performed. In this embodiment, the arabesque pattern is shown as a motif pattern. However, the motif pattern may be another pattern such as a floral pattern or a color.

  Next, at timing T1, the change in the effect design becomes a high-speed change, and in the first system notice area 91 of the display screen of the effect display device 9, the character A210 appears as the notice effect A in the first step-up notice from the right side of the screen. As a notice effect W in the second step-up notice, the beetle character 220 flies from the right side of the screen (1-2). In this case, the tree 200A displayed on the effect display device 9 is displayed in the arabesque motif mode. Thereafter, the character A210 goes to the right of the screen.

  FIG. 110 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example when the tree displayed on the effect display device 9 is displayed in the arabesque motif mode. For example, when it is not determined to display the tree to be displayed on the screen of the effect display device 9 in the arabesque motif mode, as shown in FIG. 110 (A), a normal display mode (for example, no pattern) The tree 200 is displayed in a mode in which colors such as green and brown are used to indicate leaves and trunks), whereas the tree displayed on the screen of the effect display device 9 is determined to be displayed in the arabesque motif mode. In the case of being present, as shown in FIG. 110 (B), an effect of displaying the tree 200A in an arabesque motif mode (specifically, an arabesque pattern) is performed. In this embodiment, the arabesque pattern is shown as a motif pattern. However, the motif pattern may be another pattern such as a floral pattern or a color.

  At time T2, the character B211A appears from the right side as the notice effect B in the first step-up notice, and the beetle character 220 stays on the tree 200 as the notice effect X in the second step-up notice (1-3). In this case, the person B211A displayed on the effect display device 9 is displayed in the arabesque motif mode. Thereafter, the character B211A leaves on the right side of the screen.

  FIG. 111 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example in the case where the person displayed on the effect display device 9 is displayed in the arabesque motif mode. For example, when it is not decided to display the person to be displayed on the screen of the effect display device 9 in the arabesque motif mode, as shown in FIG. 111 (A), a normal display mode (for example, predetermined clothing) In the case where the person B211 is displayed in the pattern or color of the display), the person to be displayed on the screen of the effect display device 9 is determined to be displayed in the arabesque motif mode. As shown in 111 (B), an effect of displaying the tree figure B211A in an arabesque motif mode (specifically, an arabesque pattern) is performed. In this embodiment, the arabesque pattern is shown as a motif pattern. However, the motif pattern may be another pattern such as a floral pattern or a color.

  At timing T3, the character C212 appears from the right side as the notice effect C in the first step-up notice, and the effect that the wind 200 blows and the tree 200 shakes as the notice effect Y1 in the second step-up notice (1). -4). Thereafter, the character C212 goes to the right of the screen.

  At timing T4, an effect in which characters A210, B211 and C212 simultaneously appear from the left of the screen is executed as a notice effect D in the first step-up notice, and a seagull 250A flies as a notice effect Z1 in the second step-up notice. The effect that comes is executed, and the left symbol 9LA (“7”) is stopped (1-5). In this case, the seagull 250A displayed on the effect display device 9 is displayed in the arabesque motif mode. Further, the left symbol 9LA (“7”) to be stopped is displayed in the arabesque motif mode.

  FIG. 112 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example when “gull” displayed on the effect display device 9 is displayed in the arabesque motif mode. For example, when it is not decided to display the “gull” displayed on the screen of the effect display device 9 in the arabesque motif mode, as shown in FIG. 112 (A), a normal display mode (for example, beak The seagull 250 is displayed in a mode in which only the tip of the wing is black and the others are displayed in white), whereas the “gull” displayed on the screen of the effect display device 9 is determined to be displayed in the arabesque motif mode. If it is, the effect of displaying the seagull 250A in an arabesque motif mode (specifically, an arabesque pattern) is performed as shown in FIG. 112 (B). In this embodiment, the arabesque pattern is shown as a motif pattern. However, the motif pattern may be another pattern such as a floral pattern or a color.

  At timing T5, an effect in which the character D213 appears from the left of the screen is executed as the notice effect E in the first step-up notice, the right symbol 9RA (“7”) is stopped, and reach occurs (1-6). In this case, the right symbol 9RA ("7") to be stopped is displayed in the arabesque motif mode.

  FIG. 113 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example when the effect symbol displayed on the effect display device 9 is displayed in the arabesque motif mode. For example, when it is not decided to display the effect design to be displayed on the screen of the effect display device 9 in the arabesque motif mode, as shown in FIG. While the left symbol 9L and the right symbol 9R are displayed in the manner of displaying the effect symbol in one color), the effect symbol displayed on the screen of the effect display device 9 is determined to be displayed in the arabesque motif mode. If so, as shown in FIG. 113 (B), an effect of displaying the left symbol 9LA and the right symbol 9RA in an arabesque motif mode (specifically, an arabesque pattern) is performed. In this embodiment, the arabesque pattern is shown as a motif pattern. However, the motif pattern may be another pattern such as a floral pattern or a color.

  108 shows the appearance timing when the arabesque motif mode appears five times, but the arabesque motif mode does not always appear five times, and depending on the determination result of the notice effect setting processing, During a single variation display of a symbol, an arabesque motif may appear only once, appear twice, appear three times, or appear four times.

  107 and 108 show the case where the arabesque motif mode appears when the first notice effect is executed. However, when the notice effect after the second notice effect described below is executed. However, there is a case where an effect of causing an arabesque motif mode of a similar mode to appear.

  FIG. 114 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the second notice effect. As shown in FIG. 114, when the notice effect Y2 is executed from the state in which the notice effect X is executed in the second step-up notice (the same state as FIG. 106 (1-3)), the second system notice area 92 is enlarged. Then, an effect is produced in which the wind 200 blows and the tree 200 shakes in the enlarged second system notice area 92 (FIG. 114 (1-4A). With such a configuration, the contents of the second step-up notice are emphasized. At this time, the first system notice area 91 is slightly reduced, and the character B211 appears in the first system notice area 91. This is because the first step-up notice is displayed. This shows a state in which the character B211 remains without leaving the screen because it ended with the notice effect B. However, the character B211 may not leave the screen when the first step-up notice ends. .

  Next, a specific example of the third notice effect will be described. FIG. 115 is a timing chart showing the notice timing in a specific example of the third notice effect. The example shown in FIG. 115 shows a pattern in which the reach (super reach) is generated by executing the notice effect A → B as the first step-up notice and the notice effect W → X → Y2 → Z2 as the second step-up notice.

  FIG. 116 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the third notice effect. As shown in FIG. 116, in the left middle right symbol display areas 9L, 9C, 9R, when the left middle right effect symbols are stopped (2-1), if the start condition is satisfied, all the effect symbols change. At time T1, the effect design changes rapidly, and in the first system notice area 91 of the display screen of the effect display device 9, the character A210 appears as the notice effect A in the first step-up notice from the right side of the screen. At the same time, the beetle character 220 flies from the right side of the screen as a notice effect W in the second step-up notice (2-2). Thereafter, the character A210 goes to the right of the screen.

  At timing T2, the character B211 appears from the right side as the notice effect B in the first step-up notice, and the beetle character 220 stays on the tree 200 as the notice effect X in the second step-up notice (2-3).

  At timing T3, the second system notice area 92 on the display screen of the effect display device 9 is enlarged, and the images in the second system notice area 92 (the image of the tree 200 and the image of the beetle character 220) are also enlarged. In the expanded second system notice area 92, an effect that the wind blows and the tree 200 shakes is executed as the notice effect Y2 in the second step-up notice (2-4). At this time, since the first step-up notice ends with the notice effect B, the character B211 remains in the first system notice area 91 without leaving the screen. Note that the character B211 may not leave the screen when the first step-up notice ends.

  At timing T4, in the enlarged second system notice area 92, an effect in which the enlarged seam 250 flies as the notice effect Z2 in the second step-up notice is executed, and the left symbol (“7”) is stopped. (2-5).

  After that, at timing T5, the right symbol (“7”) is stopped and reach occurs.

  As described above, since the second system notice area 92 is expanded when the notice effects Y2 and Z2 in the second step-up notice are executed, the player is informed of the continuing second step-up notice effect. It can be noticed.

  Next, a specific example of the fourth notice effect will be described. FIG. 117 is a timing chart showing the notice timing in the specific example of the fourth notice effect. The example shown in FIG. 117 shows a pattern in which a reach (super reach) occurs when a notice effect A → B is executed as the first step-up notice and a notice effect W → X → Y1 → Z2 is executed as the second step-up notice.

  FIG. 118 is an explanatory diagram of a specific example of the fourth notice effect. As shown in FIG. 118, in the left middle right symbol display areas 9L, 9C, 9R, when the left middle right effect symbols are stopped (3-1), if the start condition is satisfied, all the effect symbols change. At time T1, the effect design changes rapidly, and in the first system notice area 91 of the display screen of the effect display device 9, the character A210 appears as the notice effect A in the first step-up notice from the right side of the screen. At the same time, the beetle character 220 flies from the right side of the screen as a notice effect W in the second step-up notice (3-2). Thereafter, the character A210 goes to the right of the screen.

  At the timing T2, the character B211 appears from the right side as the notice effect B in the first step-up notice, and the beetle character 220 stays on the tree 200 as the notice effect X in the second step-up notice (3-3).

  At timing T3, in the second system notice area 92, an effect that the wind blows and the tree 200 shakes is executed as the notice effect Y1 in the second step-up notice (3-4). At this time, the second system notice area 92 is not enlarged. Since the first step-up notice ends with the notice effect B, the character B211 remains in the first system notice area 91 without leaving the screen. However, the character B211 may not leave the screen when the first step-up notice ends.

  At timing T4, the second system notice area 92 of the display screen of the effect display device 9 is enlarged, and the enlarged seam 250 is enlarged as the notice effect Z2 in the second step-up notice in the enlarged second system notice area 92. The flying effect is executed, and the left symbol (“7”) is stopped (3-5).

  After that, at timing T5, the right symbol (“7”) is stopped and reach occurs.

  Thus, since the second system notice area 92 is expanded when the notice effect Z2 in the second step-up notice is executed, the player is caused to pay attention to the continuing second step-up notice effect. be able to.

  Next, a specific example of the fifth notice effect will be described. FIG. 119 is a timing chart showing the notice timing in the specific example of the fifth notice effect. The example shown in FIG. 119 shows a pattern in which a notice effect A → B is executed as the first step-up notice and a notice effect W → X → Y3 → Z3 is executed as the second step-up notice, and a reach (super reach) occurs.

  FIG. 120 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the fifth notice effect. As shown in FIG. 120, in the left middle right symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R, when the start condition is satisfied from the state in which the left middle right effect symbols are stopped (4-1), all the variation of the effect symbols is achieved. At time T1, the effect design changes rapidly, and in the first system notice area 91 of the display screen of the effect display device 9, the character A210 appears as the notice effect A in the first step-up notice from the right side of the screen. At the same time, the beetle character 220 flies from the right side of the screen as the notice effect W in the second step-up notice (4-2). Thereafter, the character A210 goes to the right of the screen.

  At the timing T2, the character B211 appears from the right side as the notice effect B in the first step-up notice, and the effect that the beetle character 220 stops on the tree 200 as the notice effect X in the second step-up notice ( 4-3).

  At the timing T3, the second system notice area 92 of the display screen of the effect display device 9 is enlarged to be displayed on the full screen, and the images in the second system notice area 92 (the image of the tree 200 and the image of the beetle character 220) are also displayed. Enlarged. In FIG. 116 (2-4), the first system notice area 91 that can execute the notice effect in the first step-up notice remains, but in FIG. 120 (4-4), the first system notice area 91 remains. 120 (4-4) is enlarged in FIG. 120 (4-4) than in FIG. 116 (2-4). When the second system notice area 92 is displayed on the full screen, the image of the tree 200 is enlarged and the image of the beetle character 220 is also enlarged. In the second system notice area 92 that has been displayed in full screen, an effect that the wind blows and the tree 200 shakes is executed as the notice effect Y3 in the second step-up notice (4-4).

  At timing T4, in the second system notice area 92, which is displayed on the full screen, an effect that the enlarged seagull 250 flies as the notice effect Z3 in the second step-up notice is executed, and the left symbol (“7”) ) Is stopped (4-5).

  After that, at timing T5, the right symbol (“7”) is stopped and reach occurs.

  In this way, when the notice effects Y3 and Z3 in the second step-up notice are executed, the second system notice area 92 is displayed in full screen (that is, the second system notice area 92 is the first system notice area 91). And is displayed with priority over the first system advance notice area 91), so that the player can be made to pay more attention to the continuing second step-up notice effect.

  FIG. 121 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the sixth notice effect. As shown in FIG. 121, in the left middle right symbol display areas 9L, 9C and 9R, when the left middle right effect symbols are stopped (5-1), if the start condition is satisfied, all the effect symbols change. In the first system notice area 91 of the display screen of the effect display device 9, the character A210 appears as the notice effect A in the first step-up notice from the right side of the screen. As the notice effect X in the second step-up notice, the effect that the beetle character 220 flies from the right side of the screen is executed (5-2). In addition, an effect that the movable member 78 provided around the display screen of the effect display device 9 operates (the effect that the dragon movable member 78 falls down) is executed as the movable object notice at the first notice timing. (5-2).

  Thereafter, the character B211 appears from the right side of the screen as the notice effect B in the first step-up notice (5-3). At this time, the beetle character 220 is hidden behind the shadow (leaf) of the tree, and the second step-up notice has been completed.

  After that, since the character C212 corresponding to the notice effect C in the first step-up notice does not appear (5-4), the player recognizes that the notice effect has ended. As a result, he recognizes that the possibility of a big hit is low and is disappointed. However, after the predetermined time has elapsed, an effect that the movable member 78 operates (an effect in which the dragon movable member 78 falls down) is executed as a movable object notice at the second notice timing (5-5). As a result, the player has the expectation for the big hit again by recognizing that the notice effect is continued and the possibility of the big hit remains.

  Next, a specific example of e-mail notice will be described as the seventh notice effect. FIG. 122 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of an email notice as a seventh notice effect. As shown in FIG. 122, in the left middle right symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R, when the left middle right effect symbols are stopped (7-1), when the start condition is satisfied, all the effect symbols change. Is started, and the change of the design symbol becomes a high-speed change (7-2), and when the e-mail notice start timing comes, the mail receiving operation in the e-mail notice is performed below the display screen of the effect display device 9 (first system notice). In the vicinity of the area 91), “mail display content 230” and “operation button display content 231” are displayed (7-3). Thus, it is notified that the mail has been received, and the operation button 120 is prompted to operate. When the player operates the operation button 120 (or when a predetermined period has elapsed when no operation is performed), the mail is opened and the display content 232 of the letter in the mail is displayed to predict the possibility of a big hit ( 7-4). In this example, since the display content 232 of the letter is “Intense heat”, the player recognizes that the possibility of a big hit is high. In (7-4), the contents displayed in the letter are “...” that is not very likely to be a big hit, “chance” that has a higher chance of big hit than “...”, There may be a plurality of types of effects such as “extreme heat” with high possibility. In this case, in order to determine which production mode is to be executed, for example, a production mode setting table having different data depending on whether it is a big hit, a reach in the case of a shift, or a super reach is provided. The effect mode may be selected from the data based on a predetermined random number. At this time, when the data of the production mode setting table is determined to be a big hit in the pre-determined, the determination value of the random number is distributed so that “super heat” can be selected more easily than when it is determined to be out of place. In addition, determination values of random numbers are distributed so that “...” Is not easily selected.

  Next, a specific example of causing an arabesque motif mode to appear when executing a mail notice as a seventh notice effect will be described. FIG. 123 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example in which an arabesque motif mode appears when an e-mail notice as a seventh notice effect is executed. As shown in FIG. 123, in the left middle right symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R, when the left middle right effect symbols are stopped (7-1), when the start condition is satisfied, all the effect symbols change. Is started, and the change of the design symbol becomes a high-speed change (7-2), and when the e-mail notice start timing comes, the mail receiving operation in the e-mail notice is performed below the display screen of the effect display device 9 (first system notice). In the vicinity of the area 91), “mail display content 230A” and “operation button display content 231” are displayed (7-3). Thus, it is notified that the mail has been received, and the operation button 120 is prompted to operate. In this case, the display content 230A of the mail displayed on the effect display device 9 is displayed in the arabesque motif mode.

  In this embodiment, for example, when it is not determined to display the mail displayed on the screen of the effect display device 9 in the arabesque motif mode, it is shown in FIGS. 122 (7-3) and (7-4). In this manner, the mail display content 230 is displayed in a normal display mode (for example, a pattern is displayed in white color), whereas the mail displayed on the screen of the effect display device 9 is displayed as an arabesque motif. If it is decided to display in the form, as shown in FIGS. 123 (7-3) and (7-4), the mail display content 230A is displayed in the arabesque motif mode (specifically, the arabesque pattern). An effect to display is performed. In this embodiment, the arabesque pattern is shown as a motif pattern. However, the motif pattern may be another pattern such as a floral pattern or a color.

  When the player operates the operation button 120 (or when a predetermined period has elapsed when no operation is performed), the mail is opened and the display content 232 of the letter in the mail is displayed to predict the possibility of a big hit ( 7-4). In this example, since the display content 232 of the letter is “Intense heat”, the player recognizes that the possibility of a big hit is high. In (7-4), the contents displayed in the letter are “...” that is not very likely to be a big hit, “chance” that has a higher chance of big hit than “...”, There may be a plurality of types of effects such as “extreme heat” with high possibility. In this case, in order to determine which production mode is to be executed, for example, a production mode setting table having different data depending on whether it is a big hit, a reach in the case of a shift, or a super reach is provided. The effect mode may be selected from the data based on a predetermined random number. At this time, when the data of the production mode setting table is determined to be a big hit in the pre-determined, the determination value of the random number is distributed so that “super heat” can be selected more easily than when it is determined to be out of place. In addition, determination values of random numbers are distributed so that “...” Is not easily selected.

  Next, a specific example of a card notice will be described as an eighth notice effect. FIG. 124 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a card notice as an eighth notice effect. As shown in FIG. 124, in the left middle right symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R, when the start condition is satisfied from the state where the left middle right production symbol is stopped (8-1), all the variation of the production symbols is achieved. Is started, and the change of the production symbol becomes a high-speed fluctuation (8-2). When the start timing of the card notice is reached, as the card appearance operation in the card notice, the lower part of the display screen of the effect display device 9 (first line notice) In the vicinity of the area 91), “card display content 235” and “operation button display content 231” are displayed (8-3). As a result, it is notified that a card has appeared and prompts the operation of the operation button 120. When the player operates the operation button 120 (or after a predetermined period of time when no operation is performed), the card is rotated, and the display content 235 written on the card is displayed to predict the possibility of a big hit (8 -4). In this example, since the display content 235 of the card is “chance”, the player recognizes that the possibility of a big hit is high. In (8-4), the contents displayed on the card may be provided with the same production mode as the above-described mail notice. In this case, similarly to the mail notice, an effect form setting table for card notice may be provided, and the effect form may be selected in the same manner as the mail notice.

  Next, a specific example in which an arabesque motif mode appears when a card notice, which is an eighth notice effect, is executed will be described. FIG. 125 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example in which an arabesque motif mode appears when a card notice, which is an eighth notice effect, is executed. As shown in FIG. 125, in the left middle right symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R, when the start condition is satisfied from the state where the left middle right production symbol is stopped (8-1), the fluctuation of all the production symbols. Is started, and the change of the production symbol becomes a high-speed fluctuation (8-2). When the start timing of the card notice is reached, as the card appearance operation in the card notice, the lower part of the display screen of the effect display device 9 (first line notice) In the vicinity of the area 91), “card display content 235A” and “operation button display content 231” are displayed (8-3). As a result, it is notified that a card has appeared and prompts the operation of the operation button 120. In this case, the display content 235A of the card displayed on the effect display device 9 is displayed in the arabesque motif mode.

  In this embodiment, for example, when the card to be displayed on the screen of the effect display device 9 is not determined to be displayed in the arabesque motif mode, as shown in FIG. 124 (8-3), The card display content 235 is displayed in a display mode (for example, a display in a sand wall pattern), whereas the card displayed on the screen of the effect display device 9 is determined to be displayed in the arabesque motif mode. If there is, the effect of displaying the display content 235A of the card in the arabesque motif mode (specifically, the arabesque pattern) is performed as shown in FIG. 125 (8-3). In this embodiment, the arabesque pattern is shown as a motif pattern. However, the motif pattern may be another pattern such as a floral pattern or a color.

  When the player operates the operation button 120 (or after a predetermined period of time when no operation is performed), the card is rotated and the display content 235A written on the card is displayed to predict the possibility of a big hit (8 -4). In this example, since the display content 235A of the card is “chance”, the player recognizes that the possibility of a big hit is high. In (8-4), the contents displayed on the card may be provided with the same production mode as the above-described mail notice. In this case, similarly to the mail notice, an effect form setting table for card notice may be provided, and the effect form may be selected in the same manner as the mail notice.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the production control microcomputer 100 is determined to be a big hit, it has a higher ratio than the case where it is decided not to be a big hit. Thus, the display mode of the notice effect determined to be executed is determined to be a special display mode in which the arabesque motif mode appears. In addition, when it is determined to be a big hit, the number of notice effects that are executed in a special display mode that causes an arabesque motif mode to appear at a higher rate than when it is determined not to be a big hit Will increase. Therefore, in addition to notifying the expectation by simply causing the arabesque motif aspect to appear in the notice effect, it is possible to notify the expectation according to the number of notice effects that the arabesque motif aspect appears. It is possible to attract attention to the notice display. Therefore, when performing the effect of causing the arabesque motif aspect to appear in the notice effect, the interest in the game can be further improved.

  In this embodiment, when it is determined that the effect control microcomputer 100 is a big hit, the predetermined number is not less than the first predetermined number (for example, 3) during one variable display of the effect symbol. When it is determined that the arabesque motif mode is allowed to appear and is not a big hit, the number of arabesque motif modes that appear during one variable display of the effect design is limited to less than the first predetermined number. For this reason, if the Arabesque motif mode appears in the first predetermined number or more of the notice effects, it is determined that the game will be a big hit, so that the player can be more interested in the notice display. Therefore, the interest in games can be improved.

  Further, in this embodiment, when it is determined that the production control microcomputer 100 is to be a probable big hit, the second predetermined number (for example, 5) or more as a predetermined number during one variable display of the production symbol. When the arabesque motif mode is allowed to appear and is determined not to be a probable big hit, the number of arabesque motif modes that appear during one variable display of the production design is limited to less than the second predetermined number. . Therefore, if the arabesque motif mode appears in the second predetermined number or more of the notice effects, the probable big hit is determined, and the player can be more interested in the notice display. Therefore, the interest in games can be improved.

  In this embodiment, a case is shown in which the number of arabesque motif modes that appear during variable display is limited based on whether or not it is determined to be a big hit or whether or not it is determined to be a probable big hit. However, what conditions limit the number of arabesque motif modes is not limited to the case shown in this embodiment. For example, in the case of stopping a non-probable variation as a variation display result of a production symbol, the number of arabesque motif modes to appear during variable display based on whether or not a probabilistic promotion production is executed after the non-probability variation stop display. You may make it restrict | limit.

  FIG. 126 is a flowchart showing a notice effect setting process in the case where the number of arabesque motif modes that appear during variable display is limited based on whether or not a probability change promotion effect is executed. In the modification shown in FIG. 126, the processes in steps S570 to S597 of the notice effect setting process are the same as those processes shown in FIGS.

  If the second probability variation state flag is not set in step S594, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether the stop symbol determined in the effect symbol variation start process (see steps S504, S505, and S511) is a probability variation symbol. It is confirmed whether or not (step S598A). If the stop symbol is a probability variation symbol, the process ends. If the stop symbol is not a probability variation symbol (that is, if it is a non-probability variation jackpot symbol or a loss symbol), the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the promotion effect execution flag is set (step S599A). If the promotion effect execution flag is set (that is, in this case, it is a probability variation big hit, but a big hit symbol of a non-probable variation symbol is determined as a stop symbol in step S511, and a probability variation promotion effect is executed). The process is terminated as it is. If the promotion effect execution flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 determines in step S587A to S587Z whether or not it is determined that five or more arabesque motif modes will appear during one variation display of the effect symbol. Confirm (step S600A).

  When it is determined that five or more arabesque motif modes appear, the production control CPU 101 performs processing for limiting the arabesque motif modes to appear to less than five according to the rewrite table shown in FIG. 92 (step S601A).

  In step S601A, for example, when the total number of arabesque motif modes to appear is greater than or equal to a predetermined number (5 in this example) in accordance with a predetermined priority, first, as shown in FIG. When the ground to be displayed on the screen of the effect display device 9 having the lowest priority is determined to be displayed in the arabesque motif mode, the ground to be displayed on the screen of the effect display device 9 is displayed in the normal display mode. Process to change to display. Next, when the total number of the arabesque motif modes that still appear is greater than or equal to the predetermined number (5 in this example), the CPU 101 for effect control displays the tree to be displayed on the screen of the effect display device 9 with the next lowest priority. If it is decided to display in the form, the processing is performed so that the tree displayed on the screen of the effect display device 9 is changed to display in the normal display form.

  Next, when the total number of arabesque motif modes that still appear is greater than or equal to a predetermined number (5 in this example), the effect control CPU 101 selects a person to be displayed on the screen of the effect display device 9 with the next lowest priority. If it is decided to display in the mode, the process is performed so that the person displayed on the screen of the effect display device 9 is changed to display in the normal display mode. Or, when it is decided to display the mail to be displayed on the screen of the effect display device 9 having the same priority as that of displaying the person in the arabesque motif mode, the screen of the effect display device 9 Processing is performed so that the mail displayed above is changed to display in a normal display mode. Or, when it is decided to display the card to be displayed on the screen of the effect display device 9 having the same priority as that of displaying a person or an email in the arabesque motif mode, the effect display device 9 Processing is performed so that the card displayed on the screen is changed to display in a normal display mode.

  Next, when the total number of arabesque motif modes that still appear is greater than or equal to a predetermined number (5 in this example), the effect control CPU 101 displays “gull” to be displayed on the screen of the effect display device 9 having the next lowest priority. If it is decided to display in the arabesque motif mode, the processing is performed so that “gull” displayed on the screen of the effect display device 9 is changed to display in the normal display mode. Then, when the total number of arabesque motif modes that still appear is greater than or equal to a predetermined number (5 in this example), the effect control CPU 101 displays an effect symbol to be displayed on the screen of the effect display device 9 having the next lowest priority. When it is determined to display in the motif mode, the processing is performed so as to change the display of the effect symbol displayed on the screen of the effect display device 9 to the normal display mode.

  As described above, by performing the processing of steps S598A to S601A, the production control microcomputer 100 derives and displays the display result of the production symbol so that it is impossible to specify whether or not it is a probable big hit, and then the ending production When executing the probable change promotion effect, the third predetermined number (for example, 5) or more arabesque motif modes are allowed to appear as a predetermined number during one variable display of the effect symbol, and when the probable change promotion effect is not executed. The number of the arabesque motif modes that appear during one variable display of the effect design is limited to less than the third predetermined number. Therefore, if the arabesque motif pattern appears in the third predetermined number or more of the notice effects, it is determined that the probability change promotion effect will be executed even if the probability change symbol is not stopped and displayed. It is possible to attract interest in the notice display. Therefore, the interest in games can be improved.

  In this embodiment, the case of notifying that the probability change promotion is surely promoted to the probability change promotion is shown, but the case where the probability change promotion is notified as the execution result of the probability change promotion effect and the probability change promotion failed. You may comprise so that there may be a case to alert | report. Then, the number of arabesque motif modes that appear during variable display may be limited based on whether or not the probability variation promotion is successful in the probability variation promotion effect after the stop display of the non-probability variation symbol.

  FIG. 127 is a flowchart showing a notice effect setting process in the case where the number of arabesque motif modes that appear during variable display is limited based on whether or not the probability change promotion is successful in the probability change promotion effect. In the modification shown in FIG. 127, the processes of steps S570 to S597 of the notice effect setting process are the same as those shown in FIGS. In the modified example shown in FIG. 127, when executing the process (see steps S512 to S514) for determining whether or not to execute the probability change promotion effect in the effect symbol variation start process, the probability change promotion effect is changed to the probability change promotion. It is also determined whether to notify the success or to notify that the probability change promotion has failed, and when notifying that the probability change promotion is successful, the promotion success production execution flag is set.

  If the second probability variation state flag is not set in step S594, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether the stop symbol determined in the effect symbol variation start process (see steps S504, S505, and S511) is a probability variation symbol. It is confirmed whether or not (step S598A). If the stop symbol is a probability variation symbol, the process ends. If the stop symbol is not a probability variation symbol (that is, if it is a jackpot symbol or non-probability symbol of a non-probability variation symbol), the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the promotion success effect execution flag is set (step S599B). . If the promotion success effect execution flag is set (that is, in this case, the probability change promotion effect indicating that the probability change promotion has been successful is executed), the process is terminated. If the probability change success effect execution flag is not set (that is, in this case, the probability change promotion effect indicating that the probability change promotion has failed is executed, or “lost”), the process proceeds to step S600A. Note that the processes in steps S600A and S601A are the same as those shown in the modification of FIG.

  In addition, in the modification shown in FIG. 126, five or more arabesque motif modes are allowed to appear when the probability change promotion effect is executed, and the number of arabesque motif modes that appear when the probability change promotion effect is not executed. Although the case of limiting to less than 5 has been shown, conversely, when the probability variation promotion effect is executed, the number of arabesque motif modes that appear during variable display may be limited. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to know whether or not the probable change promotion effect is executed after the non-probable variable symbol is stopped and displayed as the variation display result of the effect symbol, thereby improving the interest in the game. be able to.

  In this embodiment, the production control microcomputer 100 determines the number of arabesque motif modes to appear during one variable display of the production symbol according to the priority order predetermined for each notice production. Limit to less than number. Therefore, by giving priority to the notice effect, the player can be more interested in the notice display.

  Also, in this embodiment, the production control microcomputer 100 determines the number of arabesque motif modes to appear during one variable display of the production symbol, whether the gaming state is the normal gaming state or the probability variation state. Limit to less than a different predetermined number accordingly. Therefore, the proportion of the arabesque motif appearance in the notice effect according to the game state can be changed, and the interest in the game can be improved.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, when the production control microcomputer 100 is shifted to the probability variation state, when it is determined to be a probability variation big hit or when it is determined to be lost, When it is determined that the arabesque motif mode of a fourth predetermined number (for example, 1) or more is allowed to appear as a predetermined number during one variable display of the effect symbol, and it is determined to be a normal jackpot, 1 of the effect symbol The number of arabesque motif modes appearing during the variable display is limited to less than the fourth predetermined number. Therefore, if an arabesque motif mode appears in the fourth predetermined number or more of the notice effects, the player can at least recognize that the probability variation state does not end, and can improve the interest in the game.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the production control microcomputer 100 is determined to be a probable change big hit when it is shifted to the probable change state after suddenly ending the big win gaming state based on the probable change big hit. The arabesque motif pattern of the fifth predetermined number (for example, 1) or more is allowed to appear as a predetermined number during a single variable display of the production symbol, and is usually determined to be a big hit or lost. If it has been decided, the number of arabesque motif modes that appear during one variable display of the effect design is limited to less than the fifth predetermined number. Therefore, if the arabesque motif mode appears in the fifth predetermined number or more of the notice effects, the probable big hit is determined, and the player can be more interested in the notice display. Therefore, the interest in games can be improved.

  In this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 determines the variation pattern type of the effect symbol as one of a plurality of types based on at least one of the jackpot determination result or the reach determination result. In addition, the variation pattern of the effect design is determined from the variation patterns included in the determined variation pattern type. Therefore, it is possible to easily change the design for determining the variation pattern, increase the program capacity, and improve the fun of the game by executing various effects even when the reach is not reached.

  Further, in this embodiment, the effect control microcomputer 100 determines any one of a plurality of notice effect types of the notice effect to be executed (in this example, the first step-up notice effect or the button notice effect). Then, the notice effect to be executed is determined from the notice effects included in the determined notice effect type. Therefore, it is possible to facilitate the design change of the determination of the notice effect, and it is possible to improve the fun of the game by executing various notice effects without increasing the program capacity.

  In this embodiment, the production control microcomputer 100 individually determines whether or not to execute each of the notice effects using a table set for each notice effect. Therefore, the capacity of each table for determining the notice effect can be reduced.

  The effect control microcomputer 100 may determine whether to execute each notice effect using a table in which a combination of a plurality of notice effects is set. If constituted in this way, a plurality of notice effects can be easily linked.

  Also, in this embodiment, the CPU 101 for effect control can be a big hit by changing the notice effect one or more times at a predetermined timing in accordance with a predetermined order during one variable display. The first step-up notice effect and the second step-up notice effect, which are stepwise notifications indicating that there is a possibility, are executed, and the first step-up notice effect and the second step-up notice effect are variably displayed in the same period during variable display. Since it is configured to be executable at the same time, a plurality of step-up notice effects (first step-up notice effect and second step-up notice effect) can be executed simultaneously to improve the interest.

  Further, in this embodiment, the effect control CPU 101 can simultaneously execute the first step-up notice effect and the second step-up notice effect as the step-up notice effect during the same period during variable display, and during variable display. Since the control for changing the mode of the notice effect in the first step-up notice effect and the second step-up notice effect in stages is executed at the same predetermined timing in FIG. Up notice effect (first step up notice effect, second step up notice effect) can be executed at the same time, and the stage of the step up notice effect of multiple systems (steps) can be easily made to the player Can be recognized.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, the control CPU 101 for effect control changes the notice effect in the second step-up notice effect (for example, control for changing from the notice effect X to the notice effect Y2 or from the notice effect Y1 to the notice effect Z2). ) Is executed, the display area (second system notice area 92) for displaying the notice image on the effect display device 9 is enlarged, so that the player can continue the second step-up notice effect. You can make an impression.

  Further, in this embodiment, the effect control CPU 101 executes the first step-up notice effect in the first system notice area 91 (lower display area) in the effect display device 9, and the second step-up notice effect is The control is executed in the second system notice area 92 (background display area) in the effect display device 9 and changes the notice effect in the second step-up notice effect (for example, from notice effect X to notice effect 3). When the notice effects Y1 and Y2 are changed to the notice effect Z3), the second system notice area 92 is expanded across the first system notice area 91 (the second system notice area 92 is full screen). Therefore, it is possible to further emphasize the continuation of the second step-up notice effect to the player.

  In this embodiment, since a plurality of types of timings (such as “X → Y2”, “Y1 → Z2”) are provided as timings for executing the control for expanding the second system notice area 92, the second step Variations can be made in the aspect of the up notice effect.

  Further, in this embodiment, a case where the second system notice area 92 is enlarged and a case where the second system notice area 92 is not enlarged are provided, and the specific game state is controlled when controlled to the specific game state (big hit). The second system advance notice area 92 is configured to be enlarged at a higher rate than in the case where the control is not performed. Specifically, in the second notice setting table shown in FIG. 76, when the big hit, an effect (notice effect Y2, Y3, Z2, Z3) that enlarges the second system notice area 92 is executed more than when it is lost. Many judgment values are assigned to the production mode. According to such a configuration, when the second system advance notice area 92 is expanded and the player pays attention to the second step up notice effect, the specific game state (big hit) for the second step up notice effect is obtained. The reliability can be increased and the player's expectation can be further enhanced.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, the operation button 120 is provided as an operation means that can be operated by the player, and there is a possibility that a specific display result may be obtained according to the operation control CPU 101 and the operation of the operation means by the player. It is possible to execute the button notice effect (operation notice effect) to be notified, and the button notice effect is configured to be executed at the same timing as the change timing in the step-up notice effect. It is possible to easily recognize the step-up notice stage of multiple systems.

  Further, in this embodiment, the effect control CPU 101 is configured to execute the second step-up notice effect at a higher rate than the first step-up notice effect. Specifically, when comparing the first notice setting table for determining the first step-up notice shown in FIG. 77 and the second notice setting table for determining the second step-up notice shown in FIG. 76, More judgment values are assigned to each effect mode in the second notice setting table than in the first notice setting table (conversely, the first notice setting table has more judgments for “none”. A value has been allocated.) According to such a configuration, the appearance rate of the second step-up notice effect in which the notice effect that the second system notice area 92 is expanded can be executed can be increased, and the player can It is possible to surely have an interest in enlargement, and the variation of the second step-up notice effect can be increased by expanding the second system notice area 92.

  In this embodiment, a plurality of types of effects (button notification effects and card notification effects) are provided in advance as the button notification effects, and the effect control CPU 101 selects one of the plurality of types of button notification effects. Because it is configured to be executed, the variation of the button notice effect increases, and the fun of the game is improved.

  It should be noted that a configuration in which a combination of a plurality of system step-up notices and other notices (movable object notices, etc.) is set may be used to determine all the notices at once.

  As shown in the above-described embodiment, a plurality of stages in which the second system notice area 92 is enlarged are provided (see FIG. 69). According to such a configuration, the variation of the second step-up notice can be increased, and the second step-up notice can be further noticed.

  In the above embodiment, the timing at which the second system notice area 92 is expanded is the timing at which the notice effect in the second step-up notice changes. According to this configuration, the player can easily recognize that the second system notice area 92 has been enlarged. However, the present invention is not limited to such a configuration, and the second system notice area 92 may be enlarged during the notice effect. According to this configuration, it is not possible to know when the second system notice area 92 is expanded, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In addition, when the big hit control is performed rather than the case where the big hit control is not performed, the ratio that the effect that the second system notice area 92 is expanded is increased, but a predetermined reach (for example, super reach) does not occur. When a predetermined reach occurs, the rate at which the effect that the second system notice area 92 is expanded may be increased. Further, when the reliability of the big hit is high, the timing at which the second system notice area 92 is expanded may be advanced (or delayed).

  In addition, it is preferable that each of the notices shown in the above embodiments can execute a plurality of kinds of notice modes (effect modes of notice effects) in the notice. For example, in the first step-up notice, the notice effect A includes a plurality of different kinds of notice effects A1, A2, A3... (For example, the color of clothes of the character A is different). Further, the movable object notice and the effect blade accessory notice include a plurality of different movable aspects (movable speed, movable range, number of movements, etc.) as the movable aspects of the movable member 78 and the effect blade accessory 79. In addition, button notifications include multiple types of display content (for example, "...", "chance", "super reach", etc., multiple types of different characters, display colors even if the display content is the same) Are different, etc.). In addition, the frame lamp notice includes a plurality of types of light emission modes (light emission speed, light emission color, etc.) as light emission modes. In addition, the mini character notice includes different appearances of different mini characters and different mini characters. Thus, any one of the production modes included in the predetermined notice is selected and executed.

  In the above embodiment, in the step-up notice, the execution rate of the notice and the notice mode (the notice effect) are determined depending on which fluctuation pattern is out of non-reach, normal reach, super reach, or big hit. The appearance rate is changed, but a notice setting table is provided for each variation pattern, and the notice value is changed according to the content of the probability change pattern. You may make it change a rate and the appearance rate of a notice aspect. For example, when the variation pattern executes a special effect such as pseudo-ream or sliding, the execution rate of the step-up notification or the appearance rate of a predetermined notification mode may be improved.

  In addition, in the notices other than the step-up notice, the presence / absence of the notice and the appearance rate of the notice form (effect form of the notice effect) are changed depending on whether or not it is a big hit. A plurality of different notice setting tables are provided, and a plurality of different allocations are determined according to the determination result of the pre-determining means (out-going or big hit, the type of big hit in the case of big hit) or the fluctuation pattern determined by the fluctuation pattern determining means. Any one of the notice setting tables may be selected, and the notice form to be executed may be determined based on the selected table and the notice determination random number. By configuring in this way, depending on the type of jackpot when it is a big hit in advance, execution of each notice depending on whether it will reach even in the event of a loss, and whether it will develop into a super reach at the time of reach The rate and the appearance rate of the notice mode can be determined. In addition, when the fluctuation pattern executes a special effect such as pseudo-ream or sliding, it is possible to improve the notice execution rate and the appearance rate of a predetermined notice mode.

  In the above embodiment, there may be a relationship between the two system step-up notices and the two special symbols. That is, the two system step-up notices may correspond to different special symbols. For example, the first step-up notice may be likely to appear during the change of the first special symbol, and the second step-up notice may be likely to appear during the change of the second special symbol.

  In the above embodiment, a game machine provided with two special symbol indicators (first special symbol indicator 8a and second special symbol indicator 8b) as a variable display unit is taken as an example. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine provided with a symbol display.

  In the above-described embodiment, the production control board 80, the audio output board 70, and the lamp driver board 35 are provided as the boards on which the circuit for controlling the production apparatus is mounted. You may mount on one board | substrate. Further, a first effect control board (display control board) on which a circuit for controlling the effect display device 9 and the like is mounted and a circuit for controlling other effect devices (lamps, LEDs, speakers 27, etc.) are mounted. You may make it provide two board | substrates with two production | presentation control boards.

  In the above-described embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 directly transmits a command to the effect control microcomputer 100. However, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits another command (for example, FIG. 3). The sound output board 70 and the lamp driver board 35 shown in FIG. 5 or the sound / lamp board having the function of the circuit mounted on the sound output board 70 and the function of the circuit mounted on the lamp driver board 35). A control command may be transmitted and transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 on the effect control board 80 via another board. In that case, the command may simply pass through another board, or the sound output board 70, the lamp driver board 35, and the sound / lamp board are equipped with control means such as a microcomputer, and the control means receives the command. In response to this, control related to voice control and lamp control is executed, and the received command is changed as it is or, for example, to a simplified command to control the effect display device 9. You may make it transmit to 100. Even in that case, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs the display control in accordance with the effect control command directly received from the game control microcomputer 560 in the above-described embodiment. Display control can be performed in accordance with commands received from the board 35 or the sound / lamp board.

  The present invention can be applied to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, and particularly suitably applied to a gaming machine that executes a notice effect in an effect device (effect parts) such as an effect display device provided in the game machine. Is done.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine 8a 1st special symbol display 8b 2nd special symbol display 9 Production display device 13 1st start winning opening 14 2nd starting winning opening 15 Variable winning ball apparatus 9a 1st decoration design display 9b 2nd decoration Symbol display 18c Total hold memory display 31 Game control board (main board)
56 CPU
78 Movable members 79a, 79b Production vanes (a kind of movable members)
560 Microcomputer for game control 80 Production control board 100 Microcomputer for production control

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that controls a specific gaming state advantageous to a player when a predetermined specific display result is derived and displayed on variable display means for variably displaying each of a plurality of types of identification information that can be identified.
Pre-decision means for deciding whether or not to make the specific display result before the display result of the identification information is derived and displayed;
Notice effect determining means for determining whether or not to execute each of a plurality of notice effects for notifying that it has been determined as the specific display result by the prior decision means;
The notice mode determining means for determining whether the effect mode of each notice effect determined to be executed by the notice effect determining means is a normal mode or a special mode different from the normal mode;
The notice mode changing means that can change the effect form of the notice effect determined to be the special aspect by the notice mode determining means from the special mode to the normal mode;
A notice effect execution means for executing each of the notice effects during the variable display of the identification information in the effect aspect determined by the notice mode determination means or the effect aspect changed by the notice mode change means;
The notice mode determining means is compared with the case where the prior decision means decides not to use the specific display result when the prior decision means decides to use the specific display result. Then, at a high rate, it is determined that the effect form of the notice effect determined to be executed by the notice effect determining means is the special aspect,
The notice mode changing means is a case where the notice mode determining means determines that a plurality of notice effects effect forms are the special aspects, and changes the notice effect effect form from the special aspects to the normal form. When changing the effect mode of a part of the notice effect of the plurality of notice effects determined to be the special aspect, from the special aspect to the normal aspect,
A gaming machine characterized in that at least a part of the notice effect that is executed in the special form in which the notice form changing means can change the effect form to the normal form is executed in a common effect form in each of the notice effects. .